rsa security inc. all right reserved. - fuji...

236

Upload: doanhuong

Post on 18-May-2018

217 views

Category:

Documents


1 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due
Page 2: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Microsoft Network are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, and Adobe PostScript 3 are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

EtherTalk, Macintosh, and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

PCL, HP-GL, and HP-GL/2 are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation.

RSA and BSAFE are either registered trademarks or trademarks of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.RSA Security Inc. All right reserved.

All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.

Permission has been obtained from Microsoft Corporation for use of software screen shots.

For information on license, refer to About License.

XEROX, THE DOCUMENT COMPANY, Ethernet, CentreWare, and the stylized X are registered trademarks of Xerox Corporation. DocuWorks is a trademark of Xerox Corporation or Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. All Xerox and Fuji Xerox product names are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Xerox Corporation or Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.

The data saved in the hard disk of the machine may be lost if there is any problem in the hard disk. Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data loss.

Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus or computer hacking.

Important1. This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not

be copied or modified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.2. Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.3. We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages.4. Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual.

Unauthorized operation can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems resulting from unauthorized operation of the equipment.

An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade of Japan and/or the export control regulations of the United States.

Page 3: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Table of Contents

1

Table of Contents

Table of Contents ........................................................................................................ 1

1 Before Using the Machine ........................................................................................ 7

Preface ........................................................................................................................ 8

Types of Manuals ........................................................................................................ 9

Using This Guide ....................................................................................................... 10

Organization of This Guide ................................................................................... 10

Conventions .......................................................................................................... 11

Safety Notes .............................................................................................................. 13

Electrical Safety .................................................................................................... 14

Machine Installation .............................................................................................. 15

Operational Safety ................................................................................................ 17

Consumable.......................................................................................................... 20

Regulation ................................................................................................................. 21

Radio Frequency Emissions (Class A) ................................................................. 21

Product Safety Certification (CB) .......................................................................... 21

Environment .............................................................................................................. 22

About License............................................................................................................ 23

RSA BSAFE.......................................................................................................... 23

Heimdal................................................................................................................. 23

LZMA .................................................................................................................... 23

JPEG Code ........................................................................................................... 24

Libcurl ................................................................................................................... 24

FreeBSD ............................................................................................................... 24

OpenLDAP............................................................................................................ 25

DES....................................................................................................................... 27

AES....................................................................................................................... 27

TIFF (libtiff)............................................................................................................ 27

ICC Profile (Little cms) .......................................................................................... 27

XPS (XML Paper Specification) ............................................................................ 27

Legal Notice............................................................................................................... 28

2 Product Overview .................................................................................................... 29

Machine Components................................................................................................ 30

Power On / Off........................................................................................................... 35

Powering On ......................................................................................................... 35

Powering Off ......................................................................................................... 35

Circuit Breaker........................................................................................................... 36

Power Saver Mode .................................................................................................... 37

Exiting the Power Saver Mode.............................................................................. 37

Control Panel............................................................................................................. 38

Page 4: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

2

Services and Features...........................................................................................40

Entering Text ..............................................................................................................42

3 Copy ..........................................................................................................................43

Copying Procedure.....................................................................................................44

Step 1 Loading Documents ...................................................................................44

Step 2 Selecting Features .....................................................................................46

Step 3 Entering a Quantity.....................................................................................47

Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.................................................................................47

Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status ......................................................48

Operations during Copying.........................................................................................50

Stopping the Copy Job ..........................................................................................50

Changing the Number of Copies ...........................................................................51

Interrupting the Copy Job ......................................................................................52

Copy ...........................................................................................................................53

Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies) ...........................................53

Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ...................................................56

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies).............................................................58

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).......................................................60

Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)..........................................................60

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet) .........................................61

Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)........................................................61

Image Quality .............................................................................................................62

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).......................................................62

Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density / Sharpness of images) ..........................63

Background Suppression (Erasing the Background Color of Documents) ............63

Layout Adjustment......................................................................................................64

Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .............................64

2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages).............................65

Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)...................................67

Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ......67

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) ...................68

Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)............................................................70

Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images) ..........................................72

Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images) ..............................................73

Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents) ...............74

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies).............................................................74

Output Format ............................................................................................................75

Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) ...................................................................75

Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies) ....................................................................78

Transparency Opitions (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)...........80

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet) .........................................81

Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)............................82

Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet) ........................................83

Annotations (Adding a Stamp/a Date/Page Numbers to Copies) ..........................83

Page 5: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Table of Contents

3

Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies) ................. 89

Secure Watermark (Managing Document Security) ............................................. 92

Tab Margin Shift (Copying on Tab Stock Paper) .................................................. 93

Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down)................................................ 94

Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded/Tri-Folded Paper).................................................. 95

Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet) ...................... 95

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies) ........................................................... 96

Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options) ......................................................... 96

ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card) .......................................... 98

Job Assembly ............................................................................................................ 99

Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job) ...................................................................... 99

Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)................................... 103

Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals) .......................................................... 104

Form Overlay (Making Copies to Overlay Documents) ...................................... 105

Delete Outside/Delete Inside(Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area)............................................... 106

Stored Programming........................................................................................... 107

4 Scan ........................................................................................................................ 109

Scanning Procedure ................................................................................................ 110

Step 1 Loading Documents................................................................................. 110

Step 2 Selecting Features................................................................................... 112

Step 3 Starting the Scan Job .............................................................................. 114

Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job Status ................................................... 115

Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data........................................................................ 116

Operations during Scanning .................................................................................... 117

Stopping the Scan Job........................................................................................ 117

Changing Scan Settings ..................................................................................... 118

E-mail ...................................................................................................................... 119

Address Book...................................................................................................... 119

New Repicient..................................................................................................... 122

Add Me................................................................................................................ 123

Recipient(s)......................................................................................................... 123

From.................................................................................................................... 124

Subject ................................................................................................................ 124

Message ............................................................................................................. 125

Color Scanning ................................................................................................... 125

2 Sided Scanning................................................................................................ 125

Original Type....................................................................................................... 125

File Format.......................................................................................................... 125

Scan to Mailbox ....................................................................................................... 126

Color Scanning ................................................................................................... 126

2 Sided Scanning................................................................................................ 126

Original Type....................................................................................................... 126

Page 6: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

4

Network Scanning ....................................................................................................127

Color Scanning ....................................................................................................127

2 Sided Scanning.................................................................................................127

Original Type .......................................................................................................127

File Format...........................................................................................................128

Scan to PC ...............................................................................................................129

Transfer Protocol .................................................................................................129

Address Book ......................................................................................................130

Browse.................................................................................................................130

Specifying a Destination ......................................................................................130

Color Scanning ....................................................................................................132

2 Sided Scanning.................................................................................................132

Original Type .......................................................................................................132

File Format...........................................................................................................132

General Scan Features ............................................................................................133

Color Scanning (Selecting a Color Mode) ...........................................................133

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ...................................134

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).....................................................135

File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data).........................................135

Advanced Settings ...................................................................................................143

Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph)......................................................143

Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness).........................144

Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting Contrast) ..............................................................................................................144

Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)........................145

Color Space (Specifying Color Space) ................................................................145

Layout Adjustment....................................................................................................146

Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)...................................................146

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ...................................146

Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages on Separate Sheets) ..........................147

Original Size (Specifying an Scan Size) ..............................................................148

Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ....148

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) .................149

Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)...................................................151

E-mail Options/Filing Options...................................................................................152

Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning).....152

Read Receipts .....................................................................................................153

Split Send (Sending in Sections) .........................................................................153

File Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Sent) .......................................153

Reply To (Specifying a Reply Address) ...............................................................154

File Name Conflict (Setting the Action to be Taken for File Name Conflict) ........155

Document Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Saved) ..........................155

Encryption (Sending E-mail Encrypted by S/MIME) ............................................155

Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME) ..............156

Login Name .........................................................................................................156

Page 7: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Table of Contents

5

Password ............................................................................................................ 156

Meta Data ........................................................................................................... 156

5 Send from Mailbox ................................................................................................ 157

Mailbox Operating Procedure.................................................................................. 158

Step 1 Opening the [Send from Mailbox] Screen................................................ 158

Step 2 Selecting a Mailbox ................................................................................. 158

Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ................................................. 159

Step 4 Operating Mailbox Documents ................................................................ 159

Selecting a Mailbox ................................................................................................. 160

Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox ......................................................... 161

Checking Document Details .................................................................................... 163

Printing Documents in a Mailbox ............................................................................. 164

Configuring/Starting Job Flow ................................................................................. 167

Job Flow Restrictions.......................................................................................... 170

6 Job Flow Sheets .................................................................................................... 171

Job Flow Procedure................................................................................................. 172

Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen ................................................... 172

Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet ..................................................................... 173

Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet ............................................... 173

Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet .................................................................... 173

Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet..................................................................... 174

7 Stored Programming............................................................................................. 177

Stored Programming Overview ............................................................................... 178

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs................................................... 179

Registering Stored Programs.............................................................................. 180

Registering Stored Programs for Build Job......................................................... 181

Deleting Stored Programs................................................................................... 181

Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name ...................................................... 182

Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs ................................................. 182

Calling a Stored Program ........................................................................................ 183

Calling a Stored Program for Build Job............................................................... 184

8 Web Applications .................................................................................................. 185

Web Applications..................................................................................................... 186

Accessing Web Applications ................................................................................... 187

9 Job Status .............................................................................................................. 189

Job Status Overview................................................................................................ 190

Checking Current/Pending Jobs.............................................................................. 191

Checking Completed Jobs....................................................................................... 193

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents ................................................................ 194

Page 8: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

6

Secure Print .........................................................................................................194

Sample Set ..........................................................................................................196

Delayed Print .......................................................................................................197

Charge Print.........................................................................................................198

Private Charge Print ............................................................................................200

Printing Pending Jobs ..............................................................................................203

Handling Error Terminations ....................................................................................204

10 Computer Operations ............................................................................................205

Features Overview ...................................................................................................206

Print Driver...........................................................................................................206

Network Scanner Utility 3 ....................................................................................208

CentreWare Internet Services .............................................................................208

Printing .....................................................................................................................212

E-mail Printing ..........................................................................................................213

Setup ...................................................................................................................213

Sending E-Mail ....................................................................................................213

Importing Scanned Data...........................................................................................215

Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application ....................................................215

Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3 .......................................................................217

Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services ...................................................219

Importing with the WebDAV Protocol ..................................................................220

11 Appendix .................................................................................................................221

Glossary ...................................................................................................................222

Index...............................................................................................................................227

Page 9: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

1 Before Using the Machine

This chapter describes how to use this guide, as well as safety notes and legal notice you need to read before using the machine.

Preface .........................................................................................................8

Types of Manuals .........................................................................................9

Using This Guide ........................................................................................10

Safety Notes ...............................................................................................13

Regulation...................................................................................................21

Environment................................................................................................22

About License .............................................................................................23

Legal Notice................................................................................................28

Page 10: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

1 Before Using the Machine

8

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Preface

Thank you for selecting the 4127/4112 (hereafter referred to as “the machine”).

This guide explains how to operate the machine and the precautions that must be followed during operation. To get the most out of the machine and to use it effectively, be sure to read this guide before use.

This guide assumes that an operator has a basic knowledge of the operating environment of the personal computer in use, networking environments, and how to operate a personal computer. For information on the environment of the personal computer in use, basic knowledge of networking environments, and how to operate a personal computer, refer to the manuals provided with the personal computer, operating system, and network system.

After reading this guide, be sure to keep it handy for quick reference. It will be useful in case you forget how to perform operations or if a problem occurs with the machine.

For instructions on configuring your network environment, refer to the Administrator Guide. For information about optional accessories for the printer functionality, also refer to the guide provided with each optional accessory.

In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol . Always read and follow the instructions before performing the required procedures.

The equipment is certified by NEMKO in compliance with [IEC60950-1 (AS/NZS 3260)]. The equipment is manufactured under an ISO 9001 Quality System. The equipment is also certified in compliance with applicable standards by various national bodies.The equipment was tested and is certified by the New Zealand Ministry of Commerce in conformance with CISPR publ. 22 (AS/NZISS CISPR22:2002) which relates to radio frequency interference regulations, and also complies with the Australian Communication Authority requirements.

NOTE: Machines intended for use in South Korea and Taiwan have been certified separately in compliance with their requirements.

Any unauthorized alteration, which includes the addition of new functions or the connection of external devices, may impact this certification.

Contact your local Xerox representative for a list of approved accessories.

Page 11: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Types of Manuals

9

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Types of Manuals

We provide the following guides for optimum usage of the machine.

Included Manuals

Several manuals are included with this product. They are referred to as accompanying manuals.

These accompanying manuals include descriptions on configurations and operation of the product.

The following manuals are included with the machine.

User Guide (this guide)

Describes all the necessary steps for copy/print/scan.

Administrator Guide

Aimed toward machine administrators, as a guide to setting up the network environment and to solving problems that may occur with the machine.

Quick Reference Guide

Introduces the basic operations of the machine, as well as daily management and maintenance.

Manual (HTML)

A guide for installing print drivers, configuring the printer environment, etc. This manual is included in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.

Guides for Optional Accessories

Optional accessories are also available for the machine. User Guides are provided with the optional accessories exclusively for 4127/4112. These User Guides are referred to as "guides for optional accessories". Guides for optional accessories are provided in two forms, as printed or as On-line Help.

Guides for optional accessories describe all the necessary steps for operating optional accessories and installing software.

Page 12: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

1 Before Using the Machine

10

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Using This Guide

This guide provides all the necessary copy/print/scan operating procedures, and precautions.

Organization of This Guide

This guide consists of the following chapters.

1 Before Using the Machine

Describes how to use this guide as well as cautions on using the product safely and legally.

2 Product Overview

Describes machine’s basic information such as the names of components, how to switch on and off, how to use the touch screen, and how to set the power saver feature.

3 Copy

Describes the copy features and operations.

4 Scan

Describes the scan features and operations.

5 Send from Mailbox

Describes the mailbox features and how to work with mailboxes.

6 Stored Programming

Describes the stored programming feature.

7 Job Flow Sheets

Describes operations using a job flow created on a remote system.

8 Web Applications

Describes the operations to connect to web applications.

9 Job Status

Describes how to check job status and to cancel jobs.

10Computer Operations

Describes operations performed from a computer, such as printing documents, importing scanned documents, as well as using CentreWare Internet Services.

11Appendix

A glossary of terms used in this guide.

Page 13: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Using This Guide

11

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Conventions

The screen images and illustrations that are used in this guide are based on the machine configuration with the various options. Some of the items in the screen images may not be displayed or there may be features that cannot be used depending on the machine configuration.

In this document, "Computer" refers to a personal computer or workstation.

The following terms are used in this guide:

Important : Indicates important information that you should read.

Note : Indicates additional information on operations or features.

The following symbols are used in this guide:

" " : • A cross-reference included in this guide.

: • Refers to names of CD-ROM, features, and touch screen messages and input text.

[ ] : • Refers to folders, files, applications, button or menu names displayed in the touch screen.

• The names of menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the computer screen and their buttons and menu names.

< > button : Indicates a hardware button on the computer.

< > key : Indicates a key on the keyboard of the computer.

> : • Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on the control panel. Example: When you see the procedure "select [Tools] > [Setup] > [Mailbox]", this means that you need to select [Tools], select [Setup], and then select [Mailbox].

• Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer.Example: When you see the procedure "to search for files and folders, click [Start] > [Search] > [For Files or Folders]", this means that you need to click [Start], click [Search], and then click [For Files or Folders] in order to search for files and folders.

• The reference is indicated in the following manner:"Refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tone" in the Administrator Guide." The sentence above means that you need to refer to the section "Audio Tone", which can be found under "Common Service Settings" in chapter 5 System Settings of the Administrator Guide.

Page 14: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

1 Before Using the Machine

12

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows:

, ,Long Edge Feed (LEF):Loading with one of the long edges of the document or paper.

, ,Short Edge Feed (SEF):Loading with one of the short edges of the document or paper.

LEF Orientation

Paper feed direction

SEF Orientation

Paper feed direction

Page 15: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Safety Notes

13

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Safety Notes

Before using this product, read "Safety Notes" carefully for safety use.

This product and recommended supplies have been tested and found to comply with strict safety requirements including safety agency approvals and compliance with environmental standards. Follow the following instructions for safety use.

Follow all warning instructions marked on this product. The warning marks stand for the followings:

WARNING

Any unauthorized alteration including an addition of new functions or connection to external devices may not be covered by the product warranty. Contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for more information.

Used for item that if not followed strictly, can lead death or severe or fatal injuries and the possibility to do it is comparatively high.

Used for items that if not followed strictly, can lead to severe or fatal injuries.

Used for items that if not followed strictly, can cause injuries to user or damages to machine.

A symbol for items to pay attention to when handling machine. Follow instructions carefully to use machine safely.

A symbol for prohibited items. Follow instructions carefully to avoid any dangerous acts.

A symbol for items that must be performed. Follow instructions carefully to carry out these essential tasks.

Caution Flammable Explodable Electricshock

Heatedsurface

Moving object

Pinchedfingers

Prohibited No fire Do nottouch

Do not usein bathroom

Do nottear down

Keep awayfrom wet

Never touch

Instructions Unplug Ground/Earth

Page 16: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

1 Before Using the Machine

14

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Electrical Safety

This product shall be operated by the power source as indicated on the product's data plate. Consult your local power company to check if your power source meets the requirements.

WARNING: Connect this product to a protective earth circuit.

This product is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin. The plug fits only into an earthed electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. If the plug doesn't fit to the outlet, contact an electrician to replace the outlet to avoid risk of electric shock. Never use an earthed adapter plug to connect the product to the electrical outlet that has no earth connection terminal.

Improper connection of a grounding conductor may cause electric shock.

Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet. To prevent overheat and a fire accident, do not use an extension cord, a multi-plug adaptor or a multiple connector. Consult your local Fuji Xerox representative to check if an outlet is grounded.

Connect this product to a branch circuit or an outlet that has larger capacity than the rated ampere and voltage of this product. See the data plate on the rear panel of this product for its rated ampere and voltage.

Never touch the power cord with wet hand. It may cause electric shock.

Do not place an object on the power cord.

Always keep the plug connection free of dust. The dusty and damp environment may bring about minute electric current in a connector. It may generate heat and eventually cause a fire accident.

To avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident, only use the power cord supplied with this product or the ones designated by Fuji Xerox.

The power cord is exclusive use for this product. Do not use it for any other product.

Do not damage or alter the power cord. Damage and alteration may generate heat and eventually cause electric shock or a fire accident.

If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its replacement. Do not use a damaged or uninsulated cord to avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident.

When cleaning this product, always switch off and unplug it. Access to a live machine interior may cause electric shock.

Do not unplug or re-plug this product with the switch on. Plugging and unplugging a live connector may deform the plug and generate heat, and eventually cause a fire accident.

Hold the plug not the cord when unplugging this product, or it may damage the cord and cause electric shock or a fire accident.

Switch off and unplug the product when it is not used over weekends or long holidays. It may cause deterioration of insulations and eventually electric shock or a fire accident.

Page 17: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Safety Notes

15

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Once a month, switch off this product and check ifthe power cord is plugged firmly into an electrical outlet;the plug is not excessively heated, rusted or bent;the plug and electrical outlet are free of dust; andthe power cord is not cracked or worn down.

Once you notice any unusual condition, switch off and unplug this product first and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Machine Installation

Do not locate this product where people might step on or trip over the power cord. Friction or excessive pressure may generate heat and eventually cause electric shock or a fire accident.

Never locate this product in the following places:Near radiators or any other heat sourcesNear volatile flammable materials such as curtainsIn the hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environmentIn the place receiving direct sunlightNear cookers or humidifiers

Locate this product on the level and sturdy surface that can withstand a weight of 761 Kg. Otherwise, if tilted, the product may fall over and cause injuries.

Locate this product in a well-ventilated area. Do not obstruct ventilation openings of the product. Poor ventilation may cause overheat and a fire accident.

Keep the minimum clearance as follows for ventilation and an access to the power plug. Unplug the product if an abnormal condition is noted.

700 494.91050

550

476.6

2400 ( Unit: mm)

781

661

400

With Staple Finisher D3

80 20

349103.2

1862

20

Page 18: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

1 Before Using the Machine

16

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

700 494.91055

550

476.6

2405 ( Unit: mm)

1862

781

661

400

With Booklet Finisher D3

80 20

349103.2

20

700 494.91250

805

476.6

2855 With(Unit: mm)

1862

781

661

400

80 20

549.4

103.2

With Staple Finisher D3, Folder Unit D3 (optional), and HCF (A4 2 Tray) (optional)

20

700 494.91255

805

476.6

2860 (Unit: mm)

1862

781

661

400

80 20

549.4

103.2

With Booklet Finisher D3,Folder Unit D3 (optional), and HCF (A4 2 Tray) (optional)

20

700 494.912551150

1020

476.6

4225Unit: mm

1987 1567

661 784

400

80 20

566

103

With Booklet Finisher D3, Folder Unit D3 (optional),High Capacity Stacker (optional), and HCF (A3 1 Tray) (optional)

20

Page 19: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Safety Notes

17

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Do not incline the product at more than 10 degree angle. Otherwise, it may fall over and cause injuries.

Always lock the wheels of this product after installation. Otherwise, it may fall over or slide and cause injuries.

To keep this product in a good performance and condition, always use it in the following environment:Temperature: 10 - 32°CHumidity: 15 - 85%

When the product is left in a chilly room and the room is rapidly warmed up by heater, dew condensation may form inside the product and cause a partial deletion on printing.

Operational Safety

The operator's product maintenance procedures are described in the customer documentation supplied with this product. Do not carry out any other maintenance procedures not described in the documentation.

This product features safety design not to allow operators access to hazard areas. The hazard areas are isolated from operators by covers or protectors which require a tool to remove. To prevent electric shock and injuries, never remove those covers and protectors.

To avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident, switch off and unplug the product promptly in the following conditions, then contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

The product emits smoke or its surface is unusually hot.The product emits unusual noise or odor.The power cord is cracked or worn down.A circuit breaker, fuse or any other safety device is activated.Any liquid is spilled into the product.The product is soaked in water.Any part of the product is damaged.

Do not insert any object into slots or openings of this product.

Do not place any of the followings on the product:Liquid container such as flower vases or coffee cupsMetal parts such as staples or clipsHeavy objects

back

back

frontfront left

rightleft

right

Page 20: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

1 Before Using the Machine

18

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

If liquid is spilled over or metal parts are slipped into the product, it may cause electric shock or a fire accident.

Do not use conductive paper such as carbonic paper or coated paper. When paper jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and eventually a fire accident.

When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it. Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product. Never use aerosol cleaners, or it may catch fire and cause explosion.

Never play the CD-ROM supplied with the product on an audio player. Always use a CD-ROM player. Otherwise, large sound may damage audio players or your ears.

Laser Safety

CAUTION: Any operations or adjustments not stated in the operation manual may cause hazardous light exposure and eventually burn injuries or loss of eyesight.

This product has been tested and found to comply with the Class 1 Laser Equipment requirements defined by the international standard IEC60825 and has no light exposure hazard. The product has no hazardous light emission as it features light protection components and covers to shut in all light beam during operation and maintenance.

Always follow all warning instructions marked on or supplied with this product.

To avoid the risk of burn injuries and electric shock, never touch the area with the "High Temperature" or "High Voltage" marks on.

Keep electrical and mechanical safety interlocks effective. Keep the safety interlocks away from magnetic materials. Magnetic materials may accidentally activate the product and cause injuries or electric shock.

A ground fault interrupter is embedded in this product. If current leakage occurs, the ground fault interrupter automatically cuts off power circuit to prevent electric shock and a fire accident. The ground fault interrupter is normally ON ("|"). Check once a month if the ground fault interrupter works properly in accordance with the following procedure:

(1) Press TEST button to turn off the ground fault interrupter.

(2) Check the indication ("O"). It means that the ground fault interrupter circuit works properly.

(3) Return the ground fault interrupter switch to ON ("|").

Page 21: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Safety Notes

19

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

If the circuit does not work properly, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Do not attempt to remove a paper jammed deeply inside the product, particularly a paper wrapped around a fuser or a heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause injuries or burns. Switch off the product promptly and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Never touch the paper output area of the finisher during operation. It may cause injuries.

Be careful in removing jammed staples.

Be careful not to get injured by waste staples when detaching a staple dust box.

Waste staples may come out with output paper. Be careful not to get injured by the staples.

Never touch safety interlocks. When a front cover is open, safety interlocks become activated to stop the machinery. Do not apply pressure on safety interlocks with a coin or screwdriver. Otherwise, the machinery may become activated and cause injuries.

Do not staple punched holes of paper. Sharp points of a staple may cause injuries.

Circuit breaker

Test button

Test button

Circuit breaker

Circuit breaker

Test button

Test button

Circuit breaker

Test button

Circuit breaker

Page 22: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

1 Before Using the Machine

20

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the platen glass. It may break the glass and cause injuries.

To move this product to another location, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Ventilate well during extended operation or mass copying. It may affect the office air environment due to odor such as ozone in a poorly ventilated room.

Provide proper ventilation to ensure the comfortable and safe environment.

Consumable

Store all consumables in accordance with the instructions given on its package or container.

Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Never use a vacuum cleaner for the spills. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum cleaner and cause explosion. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.

If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its disposal.

Keep the drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and consult a physician immediately.

When replacing the drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth as well as inhalation.

If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.

If you get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.

If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with water.

If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of water and consult a physician immediately.

Page 23: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Regulation

21

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Regulation

Radio Frequency Emissions (Class A)

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device, pursuant to International Standard for Electromagnetic Interference (CISPR Publ. 22) and Radiocommunication Act 1992 in Australia/New Zealand. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the product is operated in a commercial environment. This product generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the customer documentation, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this product in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference at their own expense.

Changes and modifications to this product not specifically approved by Fuji Xerox may void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Product Safety Certification (CB)

This product has been tested and found to comply with IEC60950-1:ed.1 and certified by NEMKO.

NEMKO : IEC60950-1:ed. 1

Page 24: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

1 Before Using the Machine

22

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Environment

This product consumes 1.16 W or less power even with switch off. To avoid (or save) the power consumption, unplug this product from an electrical outlet after use.

Emissions of dust, ozone and styrene from this product have been tested and found to comply with the Eco Mark criteria on chemical emission for copiers. According to the test procedures defined by JBMS-66, the test was performed under the condition of monochrome copying, using the toner type 4127/4112 toner (black) that is recommended for this product.

For environmental protection and efficient use of resources, Fuji Xerox reuses returned toner cartridges and drum cartridges to make recycle parts, recycle materials or energy recovery.

Proper disposal is required for toner cartridges and drum cartridges no longer needed. Do not open toner cartridges and drum cartridges. Return them to your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Page 25: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

About License

23

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

About License

RSA BSAFE

This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software from RSA Security Inc.

Heimdal

Copyright (c)2000 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

LZMA

LZMA SDK 4.21 Copyright (c) 1999-2005 Igor Pavlov (2005-06-08)

http://www.7-zip.org/

LZMA SDK 4.22 Copyright (c) 1999-2005 Igor Pavlov (2005-06-10)

http://www.7-zip.org/

Page 26: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

1 Before Using the Machine

24

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

JPEG Code

Our printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.

Libcurl

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright (c) 1996 - 2006, Daniel Stenberg, <[email protected]>. All rights reserved. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with orwithout fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ANDNONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEAUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGESOR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THESOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used inadvertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

FreeBSD

This product contains the part of FreeBSD codes.

The FreeBSD Copyright Copyright 1994-2006 The FreeBSD Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permittedprovided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditionsand the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list ofconditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials providedwith the distribution.

Page 27: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

About License

25

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE FREEBSD PROJECT ''AS IS'' AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FREEBSD PROJECT ORCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, ORPROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANYTHEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USEOF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of the FreeBSD Project.

OpenLDAP

Copyright 1998-2006 The OpenLDAP Foundation All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, arepermitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License.

A copy of this license is available in the file LICENSE in the top-level directory of thedistribution or, alternatively, at <http://www.OpenLDAP.org/license.html>.

OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.

Individual files and/or contributed packages may be copyright by other parties and/orsubject to additional restrictions.

This work is derived from the University of Michigan LDAP v3.3 distribution. Information con-cerning this software is available at <http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html>.

This work also contains materials derived from public sources.

Additional information about OpenLDAP can be obtained at <http://www.openldap.org/>.

---

Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Kurt D. Zeilenga.

Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Net Boolean Incorporated.

Portions Copyright 2001-2006 IBM Corporation.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, arepermitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License.

---

Page 28: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

1 Before Using the Machine

26

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Portions Copyright 1999-2005 Howard Y.H. Chu.

Portions Copyright 1999-2005 Symas Corporation.

Portions Copyright 1998-2003 Hallvard B. Furuseth.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, arepermitted provided that this notice is preserved.

The names of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote productsderived from this software without their specific prior written permission. This softwareis provided ''as is'' without express or implied warranty.

---

Portions Copyright (c) 1992-1996 Regents of the University of Michigan.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that thisnotice is preserved and that due credit is given to the University of Michigan at AnnArbor. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote productsderived from this software without specific prior written permission. This software isprovided ''as is'' without express or implied warranty.

------------------------------------------

The OpenLDAP Public License

Version 2.8, 17 August 2003

Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"),with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions aremet:

1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements andnotices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentationand/or other materials provided with the distribution, and

3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document..

The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time.

Each revision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software underterms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of thelicense.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITSCONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THEAUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S) OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-AGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTEGOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

Page 29: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

About License

27

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLI-GENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders.

OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.

Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California, USA. AllRights Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this documentis granted.

DES

This product includes software developed by Eric Young([email protected])

AES

Copyright (c) 2003. Dr Brian Gladman. Worcester. UK. All rights reserved.

This product uses published AES software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms.

TIFF (libtiff)

Lib TIFF copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam leffler

Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics. Inc.

ICC Profile (Little cms)

Little cms copyright (c) 1988-2004 Marti Maria

XPS (XML Paper Specification)

This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microslft Corporation.The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual propertymay be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369.

Page 30: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

1 Before Using the Machine

28

Befo

re Usin

g th

e Mach

ine

1

Legal Notice

Copying or printing certain documents may be illegal in your country. Penalties of fines or imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty. The following are examples of items that may be illegal to copy or print in your country.

Currency

Banknotes and checks

Bank and government bonds and securities

Passports and identification cards

Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner

Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments

This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, contact your legal counsel.

Page 31: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

2 Product Overview

This chapter describes machine’s basic information such as the names of components, how to switch on and off, how to use the touch screen, and how to set the power saver feature.

Machine Components.................................................................................30

Power On / Off ............................................................................................35

Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................36

Power Saver Mode .....................................................................................37

Control Panel ..............................................................................................38

Entering Text ..............................................................................................42

Page 32: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

2 Product Overview

30

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Machine Components

This section describes the main components and functions of the machine.

No. Component Function

1 Document cover Holds the document down.

2 Control panel Consists of operation buttons, LED indicators, and a touch screen.

Refer to "Control Panel" (P.38)

3 Document glass Load documents here.

4 Power switch Switches the power of the machine on/off.

5 Front cover Open this cover to clear paper jams and to replace the waste bottle.

6 Toner cover Open this cover to replace the toner cartridge.

7 Tray 1, 2, 3, 4 Load paper here.

8 Locking casters Used for locking the wheels of the machine. Lock these casters after moving the machine to its installation site.

9 Bottom left cover Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to remove jammed paper.

10 Front cover for high capacity tray unit.

Open this cover to access the bottom left cover of the machine to remove jammed paper.

11 Tray 6, 7 Load paper here.

12 Tray 5 (Bypass) Used for loading non-standard paper (thick-stock paper, and other special media) that cannot be loaded in Trays 1 to 4.

1 2

3 4

5

6

7

89

11

12

10

Page 33: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Machine Components

31

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Note • In this manual, the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder is referred to as the "Document Feeder".

No. Component Function

13 Left cover Opens slightly when the top cover is opened. Open this cover widely when removing jammed paper.

14 Front cover Open this cover to remove jammed paper.

15 <Confirmation> indicator This indicator lights when a document is loaded correctly.

16 Document guides Use these guides to align the edges of documents.

17 Document feeder tray Load documents here.

18 Document output tray Delivers scanned documents.

19 Document stopper Holds large document such as A3 in place. Pull this out to the right when using.

20 Waste bottle cover Open this cover when removing the waste bottle.

21 Waste bottle Collects used toner.

22 Fuser (E) Fuses toner on paper. This is extremely hot, so do not touch it.

23 Lever Use this lever when pulling out the transfer module.

24 Transfer module Transfers an image on the drum to paper. Open this when removing jammed paper.

25 Toner cartridge Contains toner (image forming powder).

13

14 15

1617 18

212223

24

25

20

19

Page 34: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

2 Product Overview

32

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

FiniFinisher D3/Booklet Finisher D3

No. Component Function

26 Interposer (Cover/Transparency separator tray)

Load paper or transparencies for covers or separators. The machine does not copy on paper or transparencies loaded in this tray.

27 De-curl button Fixes the curl of output copies.

28 Output tray Delivers regular copies. Use the finisher tray when outputting a large amount of copies or prints. For a regular amount of copies or prints, select either the output tray or finisher tray.

29 Finisher tray Use this tray when outputting a large amount of copies or prints or when stapling the output.

30 Booklet output tray*1 Delivers bi-folded or bi-folded and stapled copies.

31 Booklet output tray button*1 Press this button to move booklets that have been delivered to a position where they can be removed.

32 Right cover Open this cover to clear paper jams; replace staples or clear jammed staples; or remove scraps from the hole punch waste container.

33 Staple cartridges for booklet*1

Contains two staple cartridges for the Booklet Creation feature. Remove these cartridges to replace staples and clear staple jams.

34 Staple waste container Collects scraps from the stapler. Remove this cartridge to replace the staple waste container.

26

27 28

29

30

31

32

333436 35

3839

37

Page 35: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Machine Components

33

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

*1 Only available when the Booklet Finisher D3 is installed.

*2 Only available when the Folding Unit (Z and C) is installed.Note • The Finisher and Booklet Finisher D3 are optional. In this manual, the Finisher and Booklet

Finisher D3 are both referred to as the "Finisher".

A3 Plus High Capacity Tray

35 Staple cartridge Contains staple nails. Remove this when it needs to be replaced or when clearing staple jams.

36 Hole punch waste container Collects scraps from the puncher. Remove this when discarding scraps.

37 Tri-Fold output tray*2 Delivers tri-folded (C fold and Z fold) copies.

38 Tri-Fold output tray button*2 Press this button to open the Tri-Fold output tray.

39 Left cover Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to clear paper jams.

No. Component Function

1 Circuit breaker Automatically shuts off electricity in the event of current leakage.

2 Tray 5 (bypass) Use this when copying or printing on paper that cannot be loaded in Trays 1 - 4, such as heavyweight paper or other special media.

3 Tray 5 (bypass) top cover Open this cover to clear paper jams.

4 High Capacity Tray unit Delivers paper fed through the High Capacity Tray or Tray 5 (bypass) to the main unit. Open this unit when clearing paper jams.

No. Component Function

5

3

21

4

Page 36: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

2 Product Overview

34

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

High Capacity Stacker

5 A3 Plus High Capacity Tray(Tray 6)

Load paper here. If you close the tray after loading paper, the tray automatically adjusts the its front and rear positions based on the center of the paper.

No. Component Function

1 De-curl button Fixes the curl of output copies if they are curled when they were deliverd.

2 Error lamp If a paper jam occurs, the lamp of the jammed location lights up.

3 Sample button Press this button to output a sample page onto the stacker output tray.

4 Paper eject button Press this button when removing copied outputs.

5 Stacker output tray Delivers a sample page or sample set of a document.

6 Circuit breaker (Interface module)

Automatically shuts off electricity in the event of current leakage.

7 Circuit breaker (High capacity stacker)

Automatically shuts off electricity in the event of current leakage.

8 Stacker top cover Open this cover when clearing paper jams.

9 Stacker cart Delivers copied outputs.

10 Stacker lower cover Open this cover when removing copied outputs.

11 Interface module front cover Open this cover wohen clearing paper jams.

No. Component Function

12 3

4

11

9

5

67

8

10

Page 37: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Power On / Off

35

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Power On / Off

To use the machine, turn its power on.

The machine takes approximately 5 minutes to warm up and to be ready to copy or print. This may take more time depending on your machine configuration.

Switch the power off at the end of the day or when not using the machine for an extended period of time. Use also the Power Saving feature to save power consumption while the machine is not in use.Note • Switching off the power of the machine may cause loss of data being processed.

For information on the power saving feature, refer to "Power Saver Mode" (P.37).

Powering On

Follow the step below to switch the power on.1 Open the cover and press the power switch

to the [|] position to turn the power on.

Note • The "Please wait..." message indicates that the machine is warming up. The machine cannot be used when the message is displayed.

Powering Off

Follow the steps below to switch the power off.Important • Switching the power off may erase the data being processed.

2 Make sure that the machine is not in operation before switching the power off. Also make sure that the <Online> indicator is not lit.

Important • Do not switch the power off in the following situations:

- While data is being received

- While data is being sent (FTP/SMB/e-mail)

- While a job is being printed.

- While a job is being copied

- While a job is being scanned

- While data is being imported from a computer

3 Press the power switch to the [ ] position.

Important • If you switch off the machine, it remains on for a while to prepare for shutdown. Do not unplug the power cord from the power outlet immediately after switching the power off.

Note • If switching the power on right after switching it off, make sure that the display and the <Job in Memory> indicator have gone out.

Page 38: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

2 Product Overview

36

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Circuit Breaker

The machine is provided with a circuit breaker.

In the event of a current leakage, the breaker will automatically cut off the power circuit to prevent any leakage or fire from occurring.

The circuit breaker is normally in the On ("l") position as shown in the figure.

If the breaker is in the Off ("O") position, unusual conditions may occur. Please contact our Customer Support Center.For information on how to check if the circuit breaker is working, refer to "Safety Notes" (P.13)

Circuit breaker

Circuit breaker

Circuit breaker

Circuit breaker

Circuit breaker

Page 39: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Power Saver Mode

37

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Power Saver Mode

The machine is installed with a Power Saver feature that will automatically cut off the electricity to the machine if no copy or print data is received for a certain duration.

The Power Saver feature has two modes: [Low Power mode] and [Sleep mode].

The machine enters the Low Power mode after the preset time has elapsed if the machine is left unused for a fixed period of time.The machine then enters the Sleep mode if a further preset time elapses.

Low Power Mode

In this mode, the power to the control panel and fuser unit is lowered to save power.

The touch screen goes out, and the <Energy Saver> button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press the <Energy Saver> button. The <Energy Saver> button goes out to indicate that the Power Saver feature is cancelled.

Sleep Mode

In this mode, the power is lowered more than in the Low Power mode.

The touch screen goes out, and the <Energy Saver> button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press the <Energy Saver> button. The <Energy Saver> button goes out to indicate that the Power Saver feature is cancelled.

Exiting the Power Saver Mode

The following describes how to exit the Power Saver mode.The Power Saver mode is exited in the following instances:

Pressing the <Energy Saver> button

Receiving data

Clicking [Apply] on CentreWare Internet Services

1 Press the <Energy Saver> button.

  

<Energy Saver> button

Page 40: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

2 Product Overview

38

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Control Panel

The following describes the names and functions of components on the control panel.

No. Component Function

1 Touch screen Displays messages required for operation and buttons for various features. You can directly touch the touch screen to instruct operations and set features.

2 <Custom> buttons (<Copy>, <Custom 2>, <Custom 3> buttons)

Used to call their associated features.To the buttons, you can assign [Language] or any features displayed on the [All Services] screen.

For information on assigning features to the buttons, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Screen/Button Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

3 <All Services> button Used to display the [All Services] screen.

You can change the features that appear in the [All Services] screen. For details, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Screen/Button Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

    

Page 41: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Control Panel

39

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

4 <Energy Saver> button If the machine is not operated for a while, the machine's power consumption is lowered to enter the power saver mode. In the power saver mode, this button lights up. To cancel the power saver mode, press this button again.

5 <Clear All> button Returns the settings you made to their default values, to return the machine to the same status as when it is powered on.

6 <Interrupt> button/indicator Press this button to suspend a copy or print job in progress to have the machine process another job. During the Interrupt mode, the <Interrupt> button lights up. Pressing the <Interrupt> button again exits the Interrupt mode and resumes the suspended job.In this manual, this button is indicated as the <Interrupt> button.

Some types of jobs cannot be executed in the Interrupt mode. For details, refer to "15 Appendix" > "Notes and Restrictions" > "Notes and Restrictions in the Interrupt Mode" in the Administrator Guide.

7 <Stop> button Press this button to stop the current copy job or communications.

8 <Start> button Press this button to start copying or scanning.

9 Numeric keypad Use the numeric buttons on the keypad to enter the number of copies, passwords and other numerical values.In this manual, these buttons are indicated as the “numeric keypad”.

10 <C (Clear)> button Press this button if you have entered a wrong numerical value with the numeric keypad.In this manual, this button is indicated as the <C> button.

11 <Log In/Out> button Press this button to display the system administrator ID or user ID entry screen when you want to log into System Administration mode or configure authentication and account administration settings. When logged in, press this button to log out of the authenticated state.

12 <Machine Status> button Press this button to check the machine status and meters, to check the status of consumables, and to print reports.

13 <Review> button Press this button to open the [Review] screen. In this screen, you can check a list of the status of copy and scan features whose settings have changed from the defaults.

14 <Job Status> button Press this button to check or cancel the current job, to check or print saved documents, or to check completed jobs.

15 Brightness dial Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen. Use this dial to enhance or decrease the contrast.

16 <Job in Memory> indicator Lights when data is stored in the machine's memory.

You can check stored documents in [Stored Documents List]. For information on [Stored Documents List], refer to "4 Job Status" > "Printing and Deleting Stored Documents" in the Administrator Guide.

17 <Online> indicator Lights when the machine is sending or receiving data to or from a client.

No. Component Function

Page 42: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

2 Product Overview

40

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Services and Features

The machine has various features and provides valuable services. The following description outlines the features and explains the options on the [All Services] screen.Note • The arrangement of icons for the services

and features displayed on the screen can be changed by the System Administrator.

Service buttons in the [All Services] screen

Service buttons are the oval buttons in the [All Services] screen.

If you select [Not Set], the selected button position will remain empty.

Copy

Allows you to copy documents in various ways.For more information, refer to"Copy" (P.43).

E-mail

Allows you to send scanned documents by e-mail in various ways.For more information, refer to"E-mail" (P.119).

Scan to Mailbox

Enables the confidential mailbox or polling feature by storing the scanned documents to private mailboxes.For more information, refer to"Scan to Mailbox" (P.126).

Network Scanning

Allows you to scan documents, and store them as electronic documents on a file server on the network by selecting a job template which has various assigned parameters.For more information, refer to "Network Scanning" (P.127).

Scan to PC

Allows you to scan and store documents to specified destinations using the FTP or SMB protocol.For more information, refer to "Scan to PC" (P.129).

Send from Mailbox

Allows you to confirm, print, or delete the documents in a mailbox.For more information, refer to "Send from Mailbox" (P.157).

Job Flow Sheets

Allows you to register transfer settings of scan data, such as a transfer method and destination, to simplify data-transfer tasks.For more information, refer to "Job Flow Sheets" (P.171).

Stored Programming

Allows you to program frequently-used settings into a job number and recall them with just one button.For more information, refer to "Stored Programming" (P.177).

Page 43: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Control Panel

41

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Web Applications

Allows you to access web applications to store scanned documents into folders or to print stored files.For more information, refer to"Web Applications" (P.185).

Additional feature buttons in the [All Services] screen

Additional features appear in the [All Services] screen as rectangular buttons.

If you select [Not Set], the selected button position will remain empty.

Language

Allows you to select a language for user-interface text displayed on the touch screen. The machine returns to the default language setting when it is turned off and then on.The default language can be changed under [Default Language] in [System Settings]. For details on the Default Language setting, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Screen/Button Settings" in the System Administrator Guide

Setup

Allows you to create, register, and edit mailboxes, job flow sheets, and recipients on Address Book.For more information, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Setup" > in the System Administrator Guide.

Print Mode

Allows you to change and register settings for print modes.For more information, refer to "4 Machine Status" > "Machine Information" > in the System Administrator Guide.

Page 44: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

2 Product Overview

42

Pro

du

ct Overview

2

Entering Text

During operations, a screen for entering text sometimes appears. This section describes how to enter text.

You can enter the following characters: numerals, letters, and symbols.

Item Description

Entering letters and numerals If you select [Shift], uppercase letters appear. To return to the lowercase letters, select [Shift] again.

Entering symbols Select [Symbol].

Note • Depending on the keyboard, the [Symbol] button may be displayed as [More Characters].

Entering a space Select [Space].

Deleting characters Select [Backspace]. You can delete one character at a time.

Page 45: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

This chapter describes the basic copy procedures and the copy features provided by the machine.

Copying Procedure .....................................................................................44

Operations during Copying .........................................................................50

Copy ...........................................................................................................53

Image Quality..............................................................................................62

Layout Adjustment ......................................................................................64

Output Format.............................................................................................75

Job Assembly .............................................................................................99

Page 46: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

44

Co

py

3

Copying Procedure

This section describes the basic copy procedures. The following shows the reference section for each procedure.

Step 1 Loading Documents .........................................................................................................44

Step 2 Selecting Features ............................................................................................................46

Step 3 Entering a Quantity ..........................................................................................................47

Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.......................................................................................................47

Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status ...........................................................................48

Step 1 Loading Documents

There are two methods for loading documents:

Document Feeder

Single sheet

Multiple sheets

Document Glass

Single sheet

Bound documents, such as books

Document Feeder

1 Remove any paper clips and staples before loading the document.

2 Adjust the movable document guides to match the size of the document loaded.

3 Place the documents face up (when the documents are 2-sided, place the front side up) in the center of the document feeder.

Note • The indicator lights up when the document is loaded correctly.

• When documents are loaded into the document feeder, the document feeder tray lifts up. The timing of the lift can be programmed in [System Settings]. For more information, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Document Feeder Tray Elevation" in the Administrator Guide.

The document feeder supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 140 x 210 mm (A5, 5.5 x 8.5 inches) to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).

The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.

Page 47: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Copying Procedure

45

Co

py

3

For information on entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.67).

Note • The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information about paper size settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.

For information about copying mixed sized documents, refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.67).

Important • To avoid paper jams, use the document glass for folded or creased documents.

• Two sided scanning of lightweight paper 38 - 49 g/m2 is not supported.

Document Glass

1 Open the document cover.

Important • Ensure that a screen is displayed on the control panel, and then load a document. If a document is loaded before a screen is displayed, the machine may not properly detect the document size.

2 Place the document face down, and align it against the top left corner of the document glass.

3 Close the document cover.

Note • When a standard size document is placed on the document glass, the size of the document is displayed in the message area.

The document glass supports a single sheet, a book, or other similar documents up to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).Important • After using the document glass, close the document cover.

The document glass automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.

Document Type (Weight) Number of Sheets

Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) 250 sheets

Plain paper (50 - 80 g/m2) 250 sheets

Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 g/m2) 150 sheets

Heavyweight paper (129 - 200 g/m2) 100 sheets

CAUTION

Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the platen glass. It may break the glass and cause injuries.

Page 48: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

46

Co

py

3

For information on entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.67).

Note • The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Step 2 Selecting Features

You can select copy features under [Copy] on the [All Services] screen.Note • Features displayed may vary depending on the model of your machine.

• When the Authentication or Account Administration feature is used, a user ID and passcode may be required. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.

1 Press the <All Services> button.

2 Select [Copy].

3 If the previous settings still remain, press the <Clear All> button.

4 Select each tab, and configure features as necessary.

  

<All Services> button

  

<Clear All> button

Page 49: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Copying Procedure

47

Co

py

3

The following shows the reference section for each feature."Copy" (P.53)

"Image Quality" (P.62)

"Layout Adjustment" (P.64)

"Output Format" (P.75)

"Job Assembly" (P.99)

Step 3 Entering a Quantity

You can enter up to 9999 for the number of copies.

1 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad. The number of copies entered appears on the upper right of the touch screen.

2 If you enter an incorrect value, press the <C> button and then enter the correct value.

Step 4 Starting the Copy Job

1 Press the <Start> button.

Important • If the document has been set in the document feeder, do not hold down the document while it is being conveyed.

• Copies cannot be made if a copy protection code is detected.

Note • If a problem occurs, an error message appears in the touch screen. Solve the problem in accordance with the message.

• You can set the next job during copying.

If you have more documents

If you have more documents to copy, select [Next Original] on the touch screen while the current document is being scanned. This allows you to scan the documents as a single set of data.

Numeric keypad

<C> button

<Start> button

  

Page 50: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

48

Co

py

3

2 Select [Next Original] while scanning is in progress.

Note • When using the document feeder, load the next document after the machine has finished scanning the first document.

• When the above screen is displayed and no operation is performed during a certain period of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents.

3 Load the next document.

4 Press the <Start> button.If you have more documents, repeat Steps 3 and 4.

5 When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].

Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status

1 Press the <Job Status> button.

<Job Status> button

Page 51: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Copying Procedure

49

Co

py

3

2 Confirm the job status.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Page 52: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

50

Co

py

3

Operations during Copying

This section describes available operations during copying. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Stopping the Copy Job ................................................................................................................50

Changing the Number of Copies.................................................................................................51

Interrupting the Copy Job ...........................................................................................................52

Stopping the Copy Job

To cancel the copy job in progress, follow the procedure below.

1 Press either [Stop] on the touch screen or the <Stop> button on the control panel.

2 Select [Cancel].

If the screen shown in step 2 does not appear even after you press the <Stop> button on the control panel:

Depending on the job in progress, a screen for canceling the job may not appear. In that case, use the following procedure to cancel the copy job on the [Current and Pending Jobs] screen in Job Status.

<Stop> button

  

Page 53: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Operations during Copying

51

Co

py

3

1 Press the <Job Status> button.

2 Select the job to cancel, and then select [Stop].

Changing the Number of Copies

During scanning or copying the document, you can change the number of copy sets.

1 Press either [Stop] on the touch screen or the <Stop> button on the control panel.

2 Select [Change Quantity...].

<Job Status> button

<Stop> button

  

Page 54: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

52

Co

py

3

3 Set the number of copy sets with the numeric keypad. The new quantity must include the number of copies that have already been printed. You cannot enter a number less than the number of copies that have already been printed.

4 Press the <Start> button.

Interrupting the Copy Job

You can temporarily stop the copy job to have the machine process another job.

1 Press the <Interrupt> button.

Note • The interrupt indicator lights up to indicate that the machine is in the interrupt mode.

2 Load a document and set features if necessary.

3 Set the number of copy sets with the numeric keypad.

4 Press the <Start> button.

5 After you have finished making the interrupt copy, press the <Interrupt> button.

Note • The interrupt indicator goes out to indicate that the interrupt mode is exited.

• If you used the document glass to copy the document, remove the document from the document glass.

6 Press the <Start> button. The suspended copy job is resumed.

<Interrupt> button

  

Page 55: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Copy

53

Co

py

3

Copy

You can set the basic features on the [Copy] screen. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)................................................................ 53

Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ....................................................................... 56

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies) ................................................................................ 58

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .......................................................................... 60

Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options) ............................................................................ 60

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)............................................................ 61

Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density) .......................................................................... 61

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy].

2 Select a feature on the [Copy] screen.

Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)

This feature allows you to select a copy ratio to make enlarged or reduced copies.

1 Specify a copy ratio.

Copy ratio entry box

Allows you to enter a value between 25 and 400% in 1% increments, by touching the entry box and then using numeric keys, or by using the [ ] and [ ] buttons.

100%

Copies at the same image size as the original document.

Auto %

Automatically determines the copy ratio based on the document size and the paper size specified in [Paper Supply], and copies the document to fit into the paper.Note • If you select [Auto %], select an option other than [Auto Paper Select] in [Paper Supply].

Page 56: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

54

Co

py

3

Ratios (3rd to 5th buttons)

Displays preset copy ratios.You can change the copy ratio associated with each button. For information on the settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Preset Buttons" in the Administrator Guide.

More...

Displays the [Reduce/Enlarge] screen. Refer to "When [Proportional %] is Selected" (P.54), "When [Independent X-Y%] is Selected" (P.54), or "When [Calculator %] is Selected" (P.55).

When [Proportional %] is Selected

You can select a ratio from standard copy ratios, or can enter a ratio directly.

1 Select a copy ratio, or specify a value.

Copy ratio entry box

Touch the entry box, and then use the numeric keypad or the [ ] and [ ] buttons to specify a ratio within the range of 25 to 400% in 1% increments.

100%

Copies at the same image size as the original document.

Auto %

Automatically determines the copy ratio based on the document size and the paper size specified in [Paper Supply], and copies the document to fit into the paper.Note • If you select [Auto %], select an option other than [Auto Paper Select] in [Paper Supply].

Presets % (12 types)

Displays 12 preset ratios.You can change the copy ratio associated with each button. For information on the settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" in the Administrator Guide.

Copy All

Slightly reduces the specified copy ratio to copy the complete image onto the paper. When this option is selected, a check mark is displayed in the box.Important • If you select [Copy All] and you do not want to erase the edges of the document, set the

amount of edge erase to 0 mm. Note that if the amount is set to 0 mm, the edges of the copied document may get dirty or the image loss may occur.

When [Independent X-Y%] is Selected

Allows you to specify reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length separately.

Page 57: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Copy

55

Co

py

3

1 Select any item.

Width - X%, Length -Y%

Allows you to specify reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length within the range of 25 to 400% in 1% increments.

100%/100%

Copies at the same image size as the original document.

Auto X-Y%

Automatically determines the reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length so that the document image fits in the paper. When this option is selected, a check mark is displayed in the box.

Copy All X-Y%

Automatically determines the reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length so that the document image fits in the paper, and then slightly reduces the ratios so that the complete image is copied onto the paper. When this option is selected, a check mark is displayed in the box.

X:Width/Y:Length

Allows you to specify preset reduction/enlargement ratios.

Lock X- Y %

Allows you to make the same ratio adjustment for the width and length at the same time.

When [Calculator %] is Selected

You can specify values for the length and width individually.

If you specify both the original document size and the desired copy size, the copy ratios for the length and width are calculated automatically within the range from 25 to 400% according to the values that you entered.

1 Enter the width of the original document into [Original Size] of [Width X%] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

2 Enter the width of the output copy into [Copy Size] of [Width X%] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

3 In the same way, enter the length of the original document and the length of the output copy into [Original Size] and [Copy Size] of [Length Y %] respectively, and select [Next].

Page 58: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

56

Co

py

3

Note • To change a value you have entered, select [Next] to move the mark to the desired text box, and then enter a new value.

Width X% / Length Y%

Displays the ratios that are automatically calculated using the values entered in [Original Size] and [Copy Size].

Original Size

Allows you to enter the width and length of the original document, in the range of 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm increments.

Copy Size

Allows you to enter the width and length of output copies, in the range of 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm increments.

Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)

This feature allows you to select the tray that holds the paper you want to use.

1 Select a paper tray.

Auto Paper Select

Automatically determines the tray holding the appropriate paper, based on the document size and the specified copy ratio.Note • If you select [Auto Paper Select], specify an option other than [Auto %] in [Reduce/Enlarge].

Trays (2nd to 5th Buttons)

Allows you to directly select the desired tray.You can change the paper tray associated with each button. For information on the settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Copy Serivce Settings" > "Preset Buttons" in the Administrator Guide.

More...

Displays the [Paper Supply] screen.

Page 59: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Copy

57

Co

py

3

[Paper Supply] Screen

You can select a paper tray from all trays available on the machine.

1 Select a paper tray.

Paper Tray

Allows you to select a paper tray. When [Auto Paper] is selected, the machine automatically determines the tray holding the appropriate paper based on the document size and the specified copy ratio. When [Bypass] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen is displayed.Refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.57).

% Full

Displays the remaining amounts of paper loaded in trays..

Paper Size

Displays paper sizes.

Paper Type

Displays paper types.

Paper Color

When [Enabled] is selected for [Paper Color] under [Customize Paper Supply Screen] in the System Settings, the paper colors specified under [Paper Tray Attributes] are displayed.

Size Detection

When [Size Detection] is selected for [Other Attributes] under [Customize Paper Supply Screen] in the System Settings, the specified size detection method is displayed.

[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen

If you want to use paper that cannot be loaded in Trays 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 or 7, use Tray 5 (Bypass).

1 Select a paper size and a paper type.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Page 60: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

58

Co

py

3

Paper Size

Select from [Auto Size Detect], [Standard Size], and [Custom Size (Variable Size)].

When you select [Auto Size Detect], the paper size is identified automatically.When you select [Standard Size] or [Custom Size], refer to "When [Standard Size] is Selected" (P.58) and "When [Custom Size (Variable Size)] is Selected" (P.58).

Note • [Auto Size Detect] is available for standard size paper only.

Paper Type

Select a paper type.

When [Standard Size] is Selected

Select a paper size from standard paper sizes, and then select a paper type.

1 Select a paper size and a paper type.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

When [Custom Size (Variable Size)] is Selected

Set the X (width) within the range from 148 to 488 mm, and the Y (height) within the range from 100 to 330 mm in 1 mm increments.Important • If the X (width) of non-standard size paper is less than 148 mm, documents may not be

printed properly.

• When copying on both sides of non-standard size paper, specify the size within the range from 182 to 488 mm for the X (horizontal) direction and from 140 to 330 mm for the Y (vertical) direction.

1 Enter a paper size using [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].

2 Select a paper type.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)

Copies of 1-sided and 2-sided documents can be made on one side or both sides of a paper.Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting are the

same.

Page 61: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Copy

59

Co

py

3

1 Select any item.

1 1 Sided

Makes a copy of a 1-sided document on one side of a paper.

1 2 Sided

Makes a copy of a 1-sided document on both sides of a paper. The machine outputs the copies as [Head to Head]. The images are printed on both sides of each paper, and the top of the image on the front side of the paper meets at the top of the image on the back side of the same paper. When setting the output copies to [Head to Toe], select [More...] to display the setting screen.

2 2 Sided

Makes a copy of a 2-sided document on both sides of a paper. Set the original 2-sided document to [Head to Head], if the top of the images on the front and back sides is at the top of the paper. The machine outputs the copies as [Head to Head]. The images are printed on both sides of each paper, and the top of the image on the front side of the paper meets at the top of the image on the back side of the same paper. When setting the original document to [Head to Toe] or when setting the output copies as [Head to Toe], select [More...] to display the setting screen.

2 1 Sided

Makes a copy of a 2-sided document on one side of a paper. Set the original 2-sided document to [Head to Head], if the top of the images on the front and back sides is at the top of the paper. The machine outputs the copies as [Head to Head]. The images are printed on one side of each paper, and the top of the image on the paper is at the top of another image on another paper. When setting the original document to [Head to Toe] or when setting the output copies to [Head to Toe], select [More...] to display the setting screen.

More...

Displays the [2 Sided Copying] screen.Refer to "[2 Sided Copying] Screen" (P.59).

[2 Sided Copying] Screen

1 Select any item.

1 1 Sided

Makes a copy of a 1-sided document on one side of the paper.

Page 62: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

60

Co

py

3

1 2 Sided

Makes a copy of a 1-sided document on both sides of the paper.

2 2 Sided

Makes a copy of a 2-sided document on both sides of the paper.

2 1 Sided

Makes a copy of a 2-sided document on one side of the paper.

Originals

Head to Head

Select this item when the first and second sides of the document are of the same orientation.

Head to Toe

Select this item when the first and second sides of the document are of the opposite orientation.This item appears when [2 2 Sided] or [2 1 Sided] is selected.

Copies

Head to Head

Select this item when you want the orientation of the first and second sides of the copy to be the same as that of the document.

Head to Toe

Select this item when you want the orientation of the first and second sides of the copy to be the opposite of that of the document.This appears when [1 2 Sided] or [2 2 Sided] is selected.

Original Orientation

In order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the set document must be configured.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the head of the document.

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top of the document facing the inner side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideway Images

Select this item when placing the top of the document facing the left side of the document glass or document feeder. Be sure to select [Sideway Images] when the top of the document is placed facing the left side (horizontal text).

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)

This feature is the same as [Original Type] of the [Image Quality] screen. Refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.62).

Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)

This feature is the same as [Copy Output] of the [Output Format] screen. Refer to "Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)" (P.96).

Page 63: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Copy

61

Co

py

3

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)

This feature is the same as [Multiple-Up] of the [Output Format] screen. Refer to "Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)" (P.81).

Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)

This feature allows you to select a copy-density level from seven levels. The copy becomes darker when you move [ ] to the left, and lighter when you move it to the right.Note • [Lighten/Darken] of the [Copy] screen and [Lighten/Darken] of [Lighten/ Darken/Contrast] in

the [Image Quality] screen are the same.

1 Use [ ] and [ ] to select from 7 density levels.

Page 64: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

62

Co

py

3

Image Quality

On the [Image Quality] screen, you can configure the image quality features. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)...........................................................................62

Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density / Sharpness of images) ..............................................63

Background Suppression (Erasing the Background Color of Documents).................................63

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy].

2 Select the [Image Quality] tab, and then select a feature on the [Image Quality] screen.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)

This feature allows you to select the type of documents, such as text and photos. By selecting a document type, you can make copies at optimum image quality.

1 Select [Original Type].

2 Select the original type.

Photo & Text

Select to make copies of documents containing both text and photos. The machine automatically distinguishes the text and photo areas and sets the appropriate image quality for each area of the document.

Text

Select to make sharp copies of text. Sharp copies of graphs, illustrations, etc. are also made in this mode.

Photo

Select this option to copy documents that contain photos only.

Light Text

Select this option for text that requires enhancement, such as handwritten pencil text.

Text on See-Through Paper

Select this option to reduce blurs of tracing paper documents or to suppress background shadows of lightweight documents.

Page 65: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Image Quality

63

Co

py

3

Note • Whether [Text on See-Through Paper] is displayed on the screen depends on the System Administration mode settings. For information, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" > "Original Type-Text on See-Through Paper" in the Administrator Guide.

Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density / Sharpness of images)

You can make copies with adjusting the copy density and sharpness.Note • [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] and [Lighten/Darken] of [Copy] are the same.

1 Select [Image Options].

2 Adjust the copy density, and sharpness with [ ] and [ ].

Lighten/Darken

Allows you to select from seven copy density levels between [Lighten] and [Darken].

Moving the arrow mark to the upper position makes the copy density lighter, and moving to the lower position makes darker.

Sharpness

Allows you to select from five sharpness levels between [Soften] and [Sharpen].

Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the contours of images sharper, and selecting a lower cell makes softer.

Background Suppression (Erasing the Background Color of Documents)

The background color of documents such as newspaper and colored paper can be erased. You can also make copies with adjusting contrast.Note • When [Original Type] is set to [Photo], the [Background Suppression] feature does not work.

1 Select [Background Suppression].

2 Select whether to suppress the background color.

No Suppression

Scans the document backgrounds with no filtering.

Auto Suppression

Suppresses the color or the document backgrounds.

Page 66: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

64

Co

py

3

Layout Adjustment

On the [Layout Adjustment] screen, you can configure features for scanning documents.The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) ...................................................64

2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages) .................................................65

Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document).......................................................67

Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) .........................67

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) .........................................68

Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position) ...............................................................................70

Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images)...............................................................72

Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images) ...................................................................73

Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents) .................................74

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies) .................................................................................74

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy].

2 Select the [Layout Adjustment] tab, and then select a feature on the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)

This feature allows you to copy facing pages of a document on separate sheets of paper in page order.It is useful if you need to make separate copies of facing pages of a bound document such as a booklet.Note • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.

• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.

1 Select [Book Copying].

2 Select any item.

Off

Does not copy as a bound document.

Left Page then Right

Copies the left page and then the right page of facing pages.

Page 67: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Layout Adjustment

65

Co

py

3

Right Page then Left

Copies the right page and then the left page of facing pages.

Top Page then Bottom

Copies the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages.

Both Pages

Copies both pages in page order.

Left Page Only

Copies the left page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Right Page Only

Copies the right page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Top Page Only

Copies the top page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Bottom Page Only

Copies the bottom page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Binding Edge Erase

Erases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)

You can assign pages when making copies of facing pages in a bound document so that pages face each other in the same way as the document. You can also specify the start page and the end page from the left and right of facing pages.Note • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.

• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.

1 Select [2 Sided Book Copy].

2 Select any item.

Off

Disables this feature.

Left Page then Right

Scans the left page and then the right page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies.

Page 68: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

66

Co

py

3

Right Page then Left

Scans the right page and then the left page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies.

Top Page then Bottom

Scans the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies.

Starting Page & Ending Page

Displays the [2 Sided Book Copy-Start Page & End Page] screen.Refer to "[2 Sided Book Copy-Start Page & End Page] Screen" (P.66).

Binding Edge Erase

Erases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

[2 Sided Book Copy-Start Page & End Page] Screen

You can set the copy start page and end page.

1 Set [Start Page] and [End Page].

Starting Page

Select the copy start page from the following items.

[Left Page] / [Right Page]

You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

[Top Page] / [Bottom Page]

You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Ending Page

Select the copy end page from the following items.

[Left Page] / [Right Page]

You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

[Top Page] / [Bottom Page]

You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Page 69: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Layout Adjustment

67

Co

py

3

Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)

This feature allows you to set the scan size for a document.

Use this feature when your document is a non-standard size, or when you want to copy your document at a size different from the original size.

The machine scans the document at the size you specify, regardless of the original size. You can add margins, or delete unnecessary margins using this feature.

1 Select [Original Size].

2 Select the size of the document.If you select a non-standard size, specify values for the X and Y directions.

Auto Detect

Detects the document size automatically.Note • If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size

appears.

Standard Size

Select a document size from 17 options.You can change the sizes displayed on the screen. For information on the settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Original Size Defaults" in the Administrator Guide.

Variable Size

Enter the desired scan size when scanning a non-standard size document or when making copies at a size different from the original document size. You can specify a value in the range of 15 to 432 mm for the width (X), and a value in the range of 15 to 297 mm for the height (Y), in 1 mm increments. The scales attached on the upper and left edges of the document glass will help you specify values.Important • When the document is loaded on the document feeder, the base point in the Y (height)

direction is the center of the edge. If you specify 100 mm, the scan height will be from 50 mm above to 50 mm below the center of the document.

Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)

When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously scan different size documents and make copies onto paper that matches the respective sizes of the documents. You can also specify the size of the paper to make copies on, so that copies are made on the same size of paper.Important • Ensure that the orientation of the first sheet of the document and the [Original Orientation]

setting are the same.

• Always load A5 documents in portrait orientation.

• When loading B5 documents together with A3 documents loaded in landscape orientation or A4 documents loaded in portrait orientation, load B5 the documents in portrait orientation.

• The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5 portrait and B4 landscape. If another combination of document sizes is used, the documents can be fed at an angle and may not be copied properly.

Note • The [Original Orientation] setting is based on the orientation of the first page of a document. Load the second and subsequent pages of the document in consideration of this setting.

Page 70: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

68

Co

py

3

1 Select [Mixed Sized Originals].

2 Select [On].

Off

Select this item when all documents are of the same size.

On

When documents of different sizes are copied, the machine automatically detects the size of each document.

Original Orientation

Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideways Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)

When you copy a document with the document cover open or when you copy a book, the edges and center margin of the document may be printed as black shadows. The Edge Erase feature allows you to erase such shadows.Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting are the

same.

Note • For 2-sided originals, the same edge erase amounts are set for the front and back sides.

• If you set [Reduce/Enlarge], the edge erase amounts will be reduced or enlarged in proportion to the ratio you configured. For information on the areas that can actually be printed, refer to "15 Appendix" > "Printable Area" in the Administrator Guide.

• If the document feeder or document glass wrongly detects the size of a document, edge erasing may not be applied accurately.

Page 71: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Layout Adjustment

69

Co

py

3

1 Select [Edge Erase].

2 Select any item.

3 Use [ ] and [ ] to set the width to erase for each of the top and bottom, left and right, and center.

Normal

Sets the Edge Erase amounts to 2 mm for the top and bottom, and left and right edges. If you do not want to erase edges, select [Edge Erase] and then specify 0 mm for the required edges.

All Edges

Erases the shadows of the four edges of a document, and also the shadow in the center of the document if it is a bound document. You can specify values for [4 Edges] and [Center] individually.

Individual Edges

Erases the shadows of the top, bottom, left, and right edges of a document, and also the shadow in the center of the document if it is a bound document. You can specify values for [Top], [Bottom], [Left], [Right], and [Center] individually.

Parallel Edges

Erases the shadows of the top and bottom edges, and left and right edges of a document, and also the shadow in the center of the document if it is a bound document. You can specify values for [Top & Bottom], [Left & Right], and [Center] individually.

Erase Value

Allows you to specify Edge Erase values.

Top & Bottom (Top/Bottom)

Erases the shadows of top and bottom edges of the document in accordance with the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Left & Right (Left/Right)

Erases the shadows of left and right edges of the document in accordance with the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Center

Erases the shadow in the center of facing pages of a bound document. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.

Original Orientation

Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Page 72: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

70

Co

py

3

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideways Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

Side 2

Appears when [Edge Erase] is selected.

Set whether the same value is set to the edge erase amount of Side 1 and Side 2.

Same as Side 1

The same value is set to the edge erase amount of Side 1 and Side 2.

Mirror Side 1

The edge erase amounts of Side 1 and Side 2 are set symmetrically.

Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)

This feature allows you to shift the position of document images so that the images are placed on the left, right, top, bottom, or center of paper. You can also adjust the amounts of the left, right, top, and bottom margins. If you make 2-sided copies, you can adjust the image positions for [Side 1] and [Side 2] individually.Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting are the

same.

Note • The settings made for the Image Shift feature are set in accordance with paper. They are not affected by the Reduce/Enlarge settings.

1 Select [Image Shift].

2 Select any item.

No Shift

Does not shift the position of document images.

Auto Center

Shifts document images so that they are placed in the center of paper.

Margin Shift

Allows you to adjust margins. Set the amounts of the top & bottom, and left & right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Side 1

Displays the [Image Shift - Side 1] screen.

Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen/[Image Shift - Side 2] Screen" (P.71).

Page 73: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Layout Adjustment

71

Co

py

3

Side 2

Displays the [Image Shift - Side 2] screen.

Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen/[Image Shift - Side 2] Screen" (P.71).

Mirror Side 1

Select this item when you want the positioning of Side 2 to match the positioning of Side 1.

Original Orientation

Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideways Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen/[Image Shift - Side 2] Screen

You can make settings for Side 1 and Side 2 individually.

1 Select any item.

No Shift

Does not shift the position of document images.

Auto Center

Shifts document images so that they are placed in the center of paper.

To make fine adjustments, set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Page 74: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

72

Co

py

3

Corner Shift

Shifts document images so that they are placed at an edge or corner of paper. You can select from 8 shift directions.

To make fine adjustments, set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Margin Shift

Allows you to adjust margins. Set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images)

If the orientation of the paper currently loaded in the tray differs from that of your document, the machine automatically rotates the document image to fit on the paper. You can also select a reference position for image rotation if documents are of mixed orientations.

This feature is available only when copies are made using A4, 8.5 x 11", or smaller size paper.

1 Select [Image Rotation].

2 Select any item.

Off

Copies documents as they are, even if they are orientated differently.

Always On

Automatically rotates document images so that the orientation of the images matches that of the paper.

On during Auto

Automatically rotates document images so that the orientation of the images matches that of the paper only when [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] or [Auto Paper] of [Paper Supply] is selected.

Rotation Direction

Displays the [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] screen.Refer to "[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen" (P.73).

Page 75: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Layout Adjustment

73

Co

py

3

[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen

You can set the reference position for rotation.

1 Select any item.

Staple Position

When the finisher is installed, [Staple Position] is displayed.If documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated to match the stapling edge specified in the settings of the Staple feature.

Portrait Original - Left Edge

If documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated so that the top edge of landscape documents is aligned with the left edge of portrait documents.

Portrait Original - Right Edge

If documents are of mixed orientations, the image will be rotated so that the top edge of landscape documents is aligned with the right edge of portrait documents.

Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images)

This feature allows you to invert document images to make mirror and negative images.Note • When [Negative Image] and [Edge Erase] are set simultaneously, the edge erase area turns

to white.

1 Select [Invert Image].

2 Select any item.

Mirror Image

Creates a mirror image of the document.

Negative Image

Creates a negative image of the document.

Page 76: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

74

Co

py

3

Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents)

This feature allows you to specify the orientation of a document to have the machine identify the top of the document.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

1 Select [Original Orientation].

2 Select [Upright Images] or [Sideway Images] in accordance with the orientation of the document loaded.

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideways Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)

This feature is the same as [2 Sided Copying] of the [Copy] screen. Refer to "2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)" (P.58).

Page 77: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Output Format

75

Co

py

3

Output Format

On the [Output Format] screen, you can configure features for outputting documents.The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)....................................................................................... 75

Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies)......................................................................................... 78

Transparency Opitions (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies) ................................ 80

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)............................................................ 81

Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)................................................ 82

Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet) ............................................................ 83

Annotations (Adding a Stamp/a Date/Page Numbers to Copies) .............................................. 83

Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies)..................................... 89

Secure Watermark (Managing Document Security) .................................................................. 92

Tab Margin Shift (Copying on Tab Stock Paper) ...................................................................... 93

Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down) ................................................................... 94

Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded/Tri-Folded Paper)..................................................................... 95

Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet) ........................................... 95

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies)................................................................................ 96

Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options) ............................................................................ 96

ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card) ............................................................. 98

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy].

2 Select the [Output Format] tab, and then select a feature on the [Output Format] screen.

Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)

This feature lays out pages so that booklets are formed when the output sheets are folded in half. You can also set the binding shift and attach a cover when making booklets.

When the Booklet Finisher D3 is installed, Bi-Fold or Bi-Fold + Stapling become available.

Page 78: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

76

Co

py

3

Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the [Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.

Note • If the number of pages in the booklet is not a multiple of four, the remaining pages will be output as blank pages.

• If [Auto Paper Select] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary. For information on [Auto Paper Off], refer to "5 System Settings" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Booklet Creation].

2 Select any item.

Off

Disables this feature.

Create Left/Top Bound Booklet

Copies are made to enable left binding or top binding.

Create Right Bound Booklet

Copies are made to enable right binding.

Copy Booklet

You can output the copies of scanned documents as they are by specifying Bi-fold/Stapling. Select this when you do not need a document to be copied in booklet page order.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Covers

You can attach covers to a booklet.

No Covers

No cover is added.

Blank Covers

A blank sheet of paper is attached as the cover.

2 Sided Covers

The first and second pages of the document are copied on both sides of the cover.

1 Sided Covers - Print Outside

The first page of the document is copied on the front side of the cover.

Last Page on Back Cover

Selecting this check box copies the image of the last document page onto the last page of the copy sheets as a back cover. When you use [Divide Output] to divide a booklet into subsets, the image of the last document page will be copied onto the last page of the last subset.

Page 79: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Output Format

77

Co

py

3

Note • Depending on the number of pages in the original, a blank page may be added before the last booklet page.

Binding Shift

Displays the [Booklet Creation-Binding Shift] screen.Refer to "[Booklet Creation-Binding Shift] Screen" (P.77).

Divide Output

Displays the [Booklet Creation-Divide Output] screen.Refer to "[Booklet Creation-Divide Output] Screen" (P.77).

Fold & Staple

Displays the [Booklet Creation - Fold & Staple Options] screen.Refer to "[Booklet Creation-Fold & Staple Options] Screen" (P.78).

Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Paper Supply

Displays the [Booklet Creation - Paper Supply] screen.

Select the tray to be used for body pages from [Main Body Tray], and tray for cover from [Cover Tray]. The orientation and size of paper loaded in the trays must be the same.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.57).

[Booklet Creation-Binding Shift] Screen

You can set the binding shift value within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

1 Use [ ] and [ ] or numeric keypad to specify a binding shift value.

[Booklet Creation-Divide Output] Screen

When you have a large number of originals, the originals are divided to create subsets to reduce the thickness of each booklet. The machine folds copies in half, and piles them up to form a booklet. C-Finisher/C-Finisher with Booklet Maker allows you to specify the number of sheets within the range of 1 - 50 in 1-sheet increments. Booklet Finisher D2 allows you to specify the number of sheets within the range of 1 - 100 sheets in 1-sheet increments.Note • When specifying [Folding], set the dividing number of sheets in the range from 1 to 15.

Page 80: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

78

Co

py

3

1 Select [On].

2 Set the number of copies using [ ] and [ ] or with the numeric keypad.

[Booklet Creation-Fold & Staple Options] Screen

When the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker or Booklet Finisher D2 is installed, Bi-Fold or Bi-Fold + Stapling become available.

1 Select any item.

No Fold & Staple

No Finishing is carried out.

Fold Only

Outputting copies folded in half. The number of copies that can be folded is 5. When the number is more than 5, the document is divided by every 5 sheets.

Fold & Staple

The copies are folded in half and stapled at the center.

The number of copies that can be treated is 2 to 20.

Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies)

This feature allows you to attach covers to copies.

Different types of paper (such as colored paper and heavyweight paper) can be used as the front and back covers of copies.Important • When you select this feature, if the number of pages scanned by the machine exceeds the

maximum limit, the machine will not print the scan data. In that case, follow the message displayed on the screen to cancel the job. The maximum number of pages that the machine can scan is 2,000 pages per job. For multiple jobs, the maximum number of pages is 18,000 pages for color copies and 6,000 pages for black-and-white copies when the documents are A4 (Xerox standard size). These values are approximate and may vary depending on the paper type, size, and orientation of the original documents.

• If using Tab Stock paper, set [Output Orientation] to [Face Down] in the [Output Format] screen.

Note • If [Auto Paper Select] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary. For information on [Auto Paper Off], refer to "5 System Settings" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" in the Administrator Guide.

Page 81: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Output Format

79

Co

py

3

1 Select [Covers].

2 Select any item.

Front Cover

Attaches a front cover to the copies.

No Covers

No cover is added.

Blank Covers

Blank sheets of paper are attached as front covers.

1 Sided Cover Side 1 Only

The first page of the document is copied on the front side of the front cover. When a back cover is to be attached, the second page is copied on the back cover.

1 Sided Cover Side 2 Only

The first page of the document is copied on the back side of the front cover. When a back cover is to be attached, the second page is copied on the back cover.

2 Sided Cover

The first and second pages of the document are copied on the front and back sides of the front cover. When a back cover is to be attached, the 3rd and 4th pages are copied on the front and back sides of the back cover.

Back Cover

Attaches a back cover to the copies.

No Covers

No back cover is attached.

Blank Covers

Blank sheets of paper are attached as back covers.

1 Sided Cover Side 1 Only

The first page of the document is copied on the front side of the back cover.

1 Sided Cover Side 2 Only

The first page of the document is copied on the back side of the back cover.

2 Sided Cover

The first and second pages of the document are copied on the front and back sides of the back cover.

Paper Supply

Displays the [Covers - Paper Supply] screen.

Select the tray to be used for body pages from [Main Body Tray], and trays for front and back covers from [Front Cover Tray] and [Back Cover Tray]. The orientation and size of paper loaded in the trays must be the same.

Front Cover Tray

Page 82: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

80

Co

py

3

Set the tray used for front covers.

Back Cover Tray

Set the tray used for back covers.

Main Body Tray

Set the tray used for the body pages of documents.

When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.57).

Important • [Auto Size Detect] of [Tray 5 (Bypass)] cannot be selected as [Covers Tray].

Front Cover Quantity

Allows you to specify the number of blank sheets to be used as front covers. This setting is displayed when [Blank Covers] is selected for [Front Cover].

Back Cover Quantity

Allows you to specify the number of blank sheets to be used as back covers. This setting displayed when [Blank Covers] is selected for [Back Cover].

Transparency Opitions (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)

This feature allows you to insert blank separators between output transparency sheets. At the same time, you can make copies for handouts. Transparency sheets must be loaded in a tray in the same orientation as the paper to be used for handouts and separators.Important • Use Xerox film [no border] transparency sheets. Using transparency sheets for color V558

[with white border] may cause a malfunction or paper jam.

Note • When loading A4 size transparencies on Tray 5 (bypass), we recommend loading them vertically.

1 Select [Transparency Options].

2 Select any item.

No Transparency Separators

Does not insert separators.

Blank Transparency Separators

Inserts a separator each time a transparency is used for copying. Only one set of copies can be made.

Blank Separators & Handouts

Inserts a separator each time a transparency is used for copying. At the same time, the required number of copies is made for handouts.

Transparency Set & Handouts

Makes copies using transparencies. At the same time, the required number of copies is made for handouts.

Page 83: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Output Format

81

Co

py

3

Paper Supply

Displays the [Paper Supply] screen. Select the tray to use.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. Refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.57).

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)

2, 4, or 8 pages of a document can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.

When you select [Multiple-Up], [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected automatically. The machine automatically sets the copy ratio and makes copies of the images so that they fit on the selected paper.Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the

[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.

Note • When [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is cancelled (a new copy ratio is selected), image loss may occur depending on the size of the document image.

• When Image Shift is set, shift is executed on the whole document. For this reason, image loss at the edge of the original may occur depending on the size of the document image.

• When Edge Erase is set, it is carried out for each document page.

• Select an item other than [Auto Paper] for the paper tray of [Paper Supply] on the [Copy] screen.

1 Select [Multiple-Up].

2 Select any item.

Off

Disables this feature.

2 Pages Up

Copies two document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper.

4 Pages Up

Copies four document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper.

8 Pages Up

Copies eight document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper.

Reading Order

Allows you to select how to lay out images on a page.

Original Orientation

Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Page 84: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

82

Co

py

3

Sideways Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)

An enlarged copy of a document can be made spread over multiple sheets.

This feature allows you to create a large poster by pasting together the copies spread over multiple sheets. Copied sheets are provided with a paste margin so that they can be pasted together. The paste margin is fixed to 10 mm.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the

[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.

Note • This feature is not supported by a document feeder.

1 Select [Poster].

2 Select any item.

No Posters

No enlarged copies are made.

Output Size

You can select from 7 paper sizes.

Enlargement %

Refer to "When [Enlargement %] is Selected" (P.82).

Paper Supply

Displays the [Paper Supply] screen.

Select the paper tray to use.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. Refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.57).

When [Enlargement %] is Selected

You can specify a different ratio for the height and width.

1 Use [ ] and [ ] to specify the height and width ratios.

Width X/Length Y

Set the height and width ratios within the range from 100 to 400% in 1% increments.

Page 85: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Output Format

83

Co

py

3

XY

You can simultaneously change the numerical values of the height and width by the same amount.

Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)

This feature allows you to copy a document image on one sheet of paper repeatedly for a specified number of times.

When the copy ratio is set to [Auto], the repeated copies of the image are reduced to fit on the selected paper. You can also specify how the repeated copies of the image are arranged.Note • When making copies at the same size as the document image, specify a number of repeats

so that the copies fit on the paper.

• If [Auto Paper Select] is set for [Paper Supply], the tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary. For information on [Auto Paper Off], refer to "5 System Settings" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Repeat Image].

2 Select any item.

Off

Disables this feature.

Auto Repeat

Automatically determines the number of copies according to the document size, paper size, and copy ratio, and then repeatedly copies the document image onto the paper.Note • Copies cannot be made when the document image is larger than the specified paper size.

Variable Repeat

Specify how many copies to place along each of the long and short edges of paper. You can specify a value between 1 and 23 for the length in the Y direction and a value between 1 and 33 for the length in the X direction.

Image Layout

Evenly Spaced

The specified number of images are evenly arranged on the paper.

Side by Side

The specified number of images are arranged with no space on the paper.

Annotations (Adding a Stamp/a Date/Page Numbers to Copies)

This feature allows you to add a stamp, a date, and page numbers onto copies.

You can select stamp, date, and page-number styles, and their print positions.

Page 86: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

84

Co

py

3

Important • When you select this feature, if the number of pages scanned by the machine exceeds the maximum limit, the machine will not print the scan data. In that case, follow the message displayed on the screen to cancel the job. The maximum number of pages that the machine can scan is 2,000 pages per job. For multiple jobs, the maximum number of pages is 6,000 pages when the documents are A4 (Xerox standard size). These values are approximate and may vary depending on the paper type, size, and orientation of the original documents.

Note • The Reduce/Enlarge feature does not affect the annotation image and text sizes.

• If you specify [Stamp], [Date], and [Page Number] together, make sure that their print positions do not overlap.

• When the [Multiple-Up] feature is used, an annotation is added to each copy page.

• When the [Repeat Image] or [Booklet Creation] feature is used, an annotation is added to each copy image.

1 Select [Annotations].

2 Select any item.

Comment

Displays the [Stamp] screen.Refer to "[Comment] Screen" (P.84).

Date Stamp

Displays the [Date Stamp] screen.Refer to "[Date Stamp] Screen" (P.85).

Page Numbers

Displays the [Page Numbers] screen.Refer to "[Page Numbers] Screen" (P.86).

Bates Stamp

Displays the [Bates Stamp] screen.Refer to "[Bates Stamp] Screen" (P.88).

Original Orientation

Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideways Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

[Comment] Screen

This screen allows you to select a stamp style and a stamp position.

Page 87: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Output Format

85

Co

py

3

1 Select any item.

Off

No stamp is added.

Comment

A stamp is added.

Stored Comment

You can select stamp text from eight options, or from user-defined text strings.For information on how to register text, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Annotation-Create Comments" in the Administrator Guide.

Apply To

Displays the [Apply Comment To] screen.You can select whether to add a stamp onto the first copy page only, or onto each copy page.

Position

Displays the [Comment - Position] screen.For side 1 of copy sheets, you can select a stamp position from nine options.For side 2 of copy sheets, you can select [Same as Side 1] or [Mirror Side 1].

Font Size

Displays the [Comment - Font Size] screen.You can select a stamp size from three options, or can directly specify a size in the range of 6 to 64 points in 1 point increments. You can also select a stamp color from seven options.

[Date Stamp] Screen

This screen allows you to add a date to copies. The date shows when you started copying the document.The date format can be changed. For details, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Machine Clock/Timers" > "Date" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select any item.

Off

No date is added.

Date Stamp

A date is added.

Apply To

Displays the [Apply Date Stamp To] screen.You can select whether to add a date onto the first copy page only, or onto each copy page.

Page 88: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

86

Co

py

3

Position

Displays the [Date Stamp - Position] screen.For side 1 of copy sheets, you can select a date position from six options.For side 2 of copy sheets, you can select [Same as Side 1] or [Mirror Side 1].

Font Size

Displays the [Date Stamp - Font Size] screen.You can select a date size from three options, or can directly specify a size in the range of 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.

[Page Numbers] Screen

This screen allows you to select a page-number style.

1 Select any item.

Off

No page number is added.

Page Numbers

Adds page numbers to copies.

Style

1, 2, 3

Adds page numbers only.

-1-, -2-, -3-

Adds page numbers, and hyphens before and after each page number. (Example: -1-)

Page1, Page2, Page3

Adds page numbers, and the text "Page" before each page number. (Example: Page1, Page2)

1/N, 2/N, 3/N

Adds page numbers, and the total number of pages to the right of each page number. (Example: 1/50, 2/50)

When [1/N, 2/N, 3/N] is selected, the value specified in the [Total Page(N)] screen is used.

-1/N-, -2/N-, -3/N-

Adds page numbers followed by the total number of pages, and hyphens before and after the numbers. (Example: -1/50-, -2/50-)

When [-1/N-, -2/N-, -3/N-] is selected, the value specified in the [Total Page(N)] screen is used.

Page 1/N, Page 2/N, Page 3/N

Adds page numbers followed by the total number of pages, and the text "Page" before each page number.

When [Page 1/N, Page 2/N, Page 3/N] is selected, the value specified in the [Total Page(N)] screen is used.

Page 89: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Output Format

87

Co

py

3

Total Pages (N)

Displays the [Page Number - Total Pages (N)] screen.

- Auto

Automatically calculates the total number of pages.

- Enter Number

Allows you to manually specify the total number of pages in the range of 1 to 9999.

Apply To

Displays the [Apply Page Numbers To] screen.Refer to "[Apply Page Numbers To] Screen" (P.87).

Position

Displays the [Page Numbers - Position] screen.You can select a page-number position from six options.

Font Size

Displays the [Page Numbers - Font Size] screen.You can select a page-number size from three options, or can directly specify a size in the range of 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.

[Apply Page Numbers To] Screen

This screen allows you to specify a page range to add page numbers.

1 Select any item.

All Pages

Adds page numbers to all copy pages.

Starting Page Number

Allows you to specify the start page to add a page number, in the range of 1 to 9999.

Use [ ] and [ ], or numeric keypad and enter the start page number.

Ending Page Number

Allows you to specify the end page to add a page number, in the range of 1 to 9999. The start page is fixed to "1".

Use [ ] and [ ], or or numeric keypad and enter the end page number.

Starting & Ending Page Numbers

Allows you to specify the start and end pages to add page numbers, in the range of 1 to 9999.

Use [ ] and [ ], or or numeric keypad and enter the start and end page numbers.

Page 90: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

88

Co

py

3

Include Covers/Separators

Available when [All Pages] is selected. To also include covers and separators, place a check mark.

Starting Number

To add page numbers onto copies, specify a starting page number. Use [ ] and [ ], or or numeric keypad to enter a number with the numeric keypad.

You can enter a value within the range from 1 to 9999.

[Bates Stamp] Screen

This screen allows you to select prefix text and to specify the number of digits to be used for page numbers.

1 Select any item.

Off

Adds no prefix text or page number.

Bates Stamp

Adds prefix text and page numbers to copies.

Stored Prefix

Allows you to use the screen keyboard to enter prefix text up to 16 characters.

Number of Digits

Displays the [Bates Stamp - Number of Digits] screen.You can specify the number of digits to be used for page numbers, between 1 and 9 digits in 1 digit increments.

Apply To

Displays the [Apply Bates Stamping To] screen.Refer to "[Bates Stamping - Print On] Screen" (P.89).

Position

Displays the [Bates Stamping - Position] screen.You can select a prefix and page-number position from six options.

Font Size

Displays the [Bates Stamping - Font Size] screen.You can select a prefix and page-number size from three options, or can directly specify a size in the range of 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.

Page 91: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Output Format

89

Co

py

3

[Bates Stamping - Print On] Screen

This screen allows you to specify a page range to add prefix text and page numbers.

1 Select any item.

All Pages

Adds prefix text and page numbers to all pages.

Starting Page Number

Allows you to specify the start page to add prefix text and a page number, in the range of 1 to 9999.

Use [ ] and [ ], or numeric keypad and enter the start page number.

Ending Page Number

Allows you to specify the end page to add prefix text and a page number, in the range of 1 to 9999.

Use [ ] and [ ], or numeric keypad and enter the end page number.

Starting & Ending Page Numbers

Allows you to specify the start and end pages to add prefix text and page numbers, in the range of 1 to 9999.

Use [ ] and [ ], or numeric keypad and enter the start and end page numbers.

Include Covers/Separators

Available when [All Pages] is selected. To also include covers and separators, place a check mark.

Starting Number

To add page numbers onto copies, specify a starting page number. Select [Enter Number using Keypad] to enter a number with the numeric keypad.

You can enter a value within the range from 1 to 999999999 when [Number of Digits] is not set, and can enter a value of up to the specified number of digits when [Number of Digits] is set. Note • If the page number exceeds the specified value during copying, the copy job will be

canceled.

Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies)

You can faintly print a sequential control number in the background of each copy page.If you set 1 as the starting number, 1 is printed on each page of the first copy set and 2 is printed on each page of the second set.

To prevent, for instance, the duplication of confidential documents that are to be distributed at a conference, you can use this feature to add sequential numbers to the copies, and associate the numbers with the conference members.

Page 92: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

90

Co

py

3

Important • When you select this feature, if the number of pages scanned by the machine exceeds the maximum limit, the machine will not print the scan data. In that case, follow the message displayed on the screen to cancel the job. The maximum number of pages that the machine can scan is 999 pages per job. For multiple jobs, the maximum number of pages is 2,000 pages for color copies and 18,000 pages for black-and-white copies when the documents are A4 LEF (Xerox standard size). These values are approximate and may vary depending on the paper type, size, and orientation of the original documents.

Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 Select [Watermark].

2 Select any item.

Control Number

Off

No control number is printed.

On

A control number is printed. Enter the starting number of the control number. You can set a control number within the range from 1 to 9999.

Stored Watermark

Displays the [Stored Watermark] screen.Refer to "[Stored Watermark] Screen" (P.91).

User Account Number

When using User Administration or Account Administration, a user account number is printed.Note • [User Account Number] is the No. (User Administration Number) registered by users in

Account Administration.

• This screen is displayed when the Account Administration feature is enabled. If the Authentication and Account Administration feature is used, [User Account Number] is displayed even when no data is collected. In this case, even if [On] is selected for [User Account Number], the No. registered by users (User Administration Number) is not printed.

Date & Time

You can print the date and time that the copy job started.For information about the format for the date, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" > "Date Format" in the Administrator Guide.

Serial Number

The serial number of the machine is printed.

Original Orientation

Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Page 93: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Output Format

91

Co

py

3

Sideways Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

Effect

Displays the [Watermark - Effect] screen.Refer to "[Watermark - Effect] Screen" (P.91).

Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

[Stored Watermark] Screen

Select the text to print on the copy.

1 Select [On].

2 Select any text.

Off

No text is printed.

On

Text is printed. You can select the text for stamp. You can specify text from 3 preset text or the text set in the System Administration mode.For information on how to register text, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" > "Custom Text 1 to 3" in the Administrator Guide.

[Watermark - Effect] Screen

You can set Text Effect on this screen.

If you enable the Text Effect feature, the text strings specified in [Control Number], [Text], [User Account Number], [Date & Time], and [Serial Number] on the [Watermark] screen are embedded in the background of each copy. When the copy is copied again, the text embedded in the background is printed as embossed or outline text depending on the option you select on the [Watermark - Text Effect] screen.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 Select any item.

Off

Disables the feature, and prints text as it is.

Embossed

Enables the feature. When the copy is copied again, the text embedded in the background of the copy is printed as embossed text.

Page 94: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

92

Co

py

3

Outline

Enables the feature. When the copy is copied again, the text embedded in the background of the copy is printed as outline text.For information about the background pattern, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" > "Background Pattern" in the Administrator Guide.

You can also set the character size, density, and other watermark print settings in the System Administration mode. For information about other advanced settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" in the Administrator Guide.

Secure Watermark (Managing Document Security)

Secure Watermark is a security management feature to embed a copy protection digital code into a document, to restrict the document to be duplicated. With the digital code, you can also analyze "when", "from which machine", and "by whom" the document was output.Important • This feature is only supported on Fuji Xerox manufactured machines that are compatible to

Secure Watermark.

• Document copy protection that is set using the Secure Watermark feature is not warranted to always function. The feature may not function depending on the document or setting conditions. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

• Note that we assume no responsibility for a damage caused by using or being not able to use the Secure Watermark feature.

• By using the Secure Watermark feature, print quality may deteriorate as follows:- Colors may become darker.- Text in documents may become hard to read.- Dots such as decimal characters and periods may become hard to read.

• The Secure Watermark feature may not work properly for a document if its size is smaller than A5, if its background color is not white, or if the Watermark or Secure Watermark feature has already used for the document.

• In some cases, a document may not be printed even if the Secure Watermark feature has not been used for the document. This happens because the machine incorrectly detects a copy protection code from the document. In that case, ask the system administrator to temporarily disable the detection feature for copy protection codes.

Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

• To analyze digital codes, an optional application, ApeosWare Secure Watermark Analyzer, is required. For information on how to use ApeosWare Secure Watermark Analyzer, refer to its documentation.

1 Select [Secure Watermark].

2 Select any item.

Off

Does not manage document security.

On

Manages document security. Select any feature button if necessary.

Protection Code

Off

Does not prevent document duplication. A digital code is embedded into copies.

Page 95: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Output Format

93

Co

py

3

Prevent Duplication

Prevents document duplication. Any documents with a copy protection code cannot be copied.

Important • This setting also affects scan operation.

Stored Secure Watermark

Displays the [Stored Secure Watermark] screen.Refer to "[Stored Secure Watermark] Screen" (P.93).

[Stored Secure Watermark] Screen

You can embed hidden text into documents.With this hidden text feature, the specified text is embedded in the entire sheet. When making a copy of a document that has been copied with this hidden text feature, the embedded text on the output appears in white regardless of whether or not the Secure Watermark kit is installed.

1 Select any item.

Off

Does not print hidden text.

On

Prints hidden text.

You can select any text from the three preset text, or from text registered in the System Settings.For information on how to register text, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Secure Watermark" > "Text Effect" > "Custom Text 1 to 3" in the Administrator Guide.

Original Orientation

Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideways Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

Tab Margin Shift (Copying on Tab Stock Paper)

This feature allows you to adjust the position of your document image to copy the image onto Tab Stock paper.

Available sizes of tab-stock paper are A4 and 8.5 x 11 inches .

Available paper trays are Trays 3, 4,and Tray 5 (Bypass). Load Tab Stock paper face up, with the edge opposite to the tab to be fed first.

Page 96: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

94

Co

py

3

1 Select [Tab Margin Shift].

2 Select any item.

Off

Disables this feature.

Shift to Tab

Copies the image located on the edge of the document onto the tab area of Tab Stock paper.

Enter a value into [Shift Value] to adjust the position of the tab image so that it is correctly copied onto the tab area. Only the shifted image is copied.

Shift All

Copies the whole image of the document onto Tab Stock paper.

Enter a value into [Shift Value] when you want to adjust the position of the image to be copied onto the tab area.

Shift Value

Allows you to specify a shift value in the range of 0 to 15 mm in 1 mm increments.

Paper Supply

Displays "Tray 5 (Bypass)".

Tab Stock Size

Allows you to select a size of Tab Stock paper.

Tab Stock Type

Allows you to select a type of Tab Stock paper.

Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down)

You can select whether copies should be output facing up or down.

1 Select [Output Orientation].

2 Select any item.

Auto

Automatically determines whether the copies should be output facing up or down.

Face Up

Copies are output facing up and delivered from the last page.

Page 97: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Output Format

95

Co

py

3

Face down

Copies are output facing down and delivered from the last page.

Face Up (Reverse Order)

Copies are delivered from the first page facing up.Note • Whether [Face Up (Reverse Order)] is displayed depends on the system setting. For

information, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" > "Output Orientation - Reverse Order" in the Administrator Guide.

Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded/Tri-Folded Paper)

This feature allows you to fold copies in half / in three.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.

• The supported paper orientation is only . Select the tray whose orientation is set to .

• Z Tri-Fold and C Tri-Fold can only be applied to A4 paper and 8.5 x 11" paper.

1 Select [Folding].

2 Select any item.

No Folding

Does not fold the copies.

Z Fold

Folds copies in three with the printed side inside.

C Fold

Folds copies in three with the printed side outside.

Single Fold

Folds copies in half.

Image Inside Fold

Folds copies so that the image is printed inside.

Image Outside Fold

Folds copies so that the image is printed outside.

Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)

This feature allows you to repeatedly copies one original onto equally divided areas according to the specified number of copies.Note • When anything other than [Auto %] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge], image loss may occur

depending on the image size.

Page 98: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

96

Co

py

3

1 Select [Preset Repeat Image].

2 Select any item.

Off

Disables this feature.

2 Pages Up

Makes two copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper.

4 Pages Up

Makes four copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper.

8 Pages Up

Makes eight copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper.

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies)

This feature is the same as [2 Sided Copying] of the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Refer to "2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)" (P.58).

Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)

This feature allows you to select finishing options.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.

If the offset stacking module is installed, the output position of copies is offset alternately to separate each set of copies.

If the finisher is installed, each set of copies can be stapled or punched, and then output.

The output destination is automatically selected depending on the selected feature. For the machine with the Booklet Finisher D3, when [Fold & Staple] for [Booklet Creation] or [Single Fold] for [Folding] is selected, documents are delivered on the booklet tray.

1 Select [Copy Output].

2 Select any item.

Page 99: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Output Format

97

Co

py

3

Auto

According to the set feature used, the machine automatically selects [Collated] or [Uncollated].

Copies are collated when any of the following features is used: auto document feeder, 2 Sided Book Copy, Covers, [Blank Separators & Handouts] or [Transparency Set & Handouts] of Transparency Separators, Booklet Creation, Stapling, Build Job, Sample Set, and Combine Original Sets.

When you do not use any of the above-described features, copies are not collated.

Collated/Staple/Hole Punch

The machine outputs sheets sorted into sets that are arranged in page order.

Uncollated

The machine outputs the specified number of copies and sorts sheets by page.

Uncollated with Separators

The machine outputs copies with inserting blank sheets as a separator and sorts sheets by page.

Staple

Sets the position for stapling. Booklet Finisher D3 is capable of stapling 2 - 100 sheets of paper (when P paper or J paper is used). Available paper types are: plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, heavyweight 1 (106 - 216 g/m2), punched paper, tab stock (106 - 216 g/m2), and custom paper 1 to 5.

Booklet Finisher D3 cuts the staple nails depending on the number of sheets. The stapled nails may be bent depending on the type of paper used.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the

[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.

• In the following cases, the actual stapling position is different from the stapling position appearing on the screen:When [Original Orientation] is set to [Upright Images], and [Stapling] is set to one position at the right side. When [Original Orientation] is set to [Sideways Images], and [Stapling] is set to one position at the left side.

Note • Depending on the type of paper that is being stapled, the stapled nails may be bent.

Hole Punch

Sets the position for punching. C-Finisher/C-Finisher with Booklet Maker offers three different punch positions to choose from: 2 Holes Left, 2 Holes Top, 2 Holes Right.Booklet Finisher D2 offers six different punch positions to choose from: 2 Holes Left, 2 Holes Top, 2 Holes Right, 4 Holes Left, 4 Holes Top, 4 Holes Right.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the

[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.

Original Orientation

Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Page 100: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

98

Co

py

3

Sideways Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

Z Fold Half Sheet

The machine folds the output copies in Z fold. Z fold can be applied to B4, A3, 11 x 17". If you have mixed sized documents, the width (vertical direction) of the paper must be the same, such as a combination of A4 (portrait) and A3 (landscape), and a combination of B5 (portrait) and B4 (landscape). For example, if you have a combination of A4 (portrait) and A3 (landscape), the Z fold is only applied to A3.

Output Destination

Allows you to select an output destination when the High Capacity Stacker is installed.

Designated Sets or Pages

When [Stacker - Stacker Cart] is selected for the output destination, you can print samples of specified portions of an output. You can specify sample sets when sorting outputs and sample pages when stacking outputs. You can specify up to 3 print samples. Samples are output on top of the stacker tray and are included in the copy set.

Note • This function may not appear depending on the model of the machine, and optional equipment is required for use. For more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

• To print a sample while printing a job, press the sample button.

ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card)

This feature allows you to copy both sides of a small undetectable original, such as an ID card, onto one side of paper. Important • Use the document glass when copying. The document feeder is not available for this

feature.

• Specify the original’s orientation correctly.

• Place the card slightly away from the top-left corner of the document glass so that the whole image can be captured.

1 Select [ID Card Copying].

2 Select the desired option.

Off

Disables ID card copying.

On

Enables ID card copying.

Page 101: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Job Assembly

99

Co

py

3

Job Assembly

On the [Job Assembly] screen, you can configure features such as Build Job and Sample Set. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job) ..................... 99

Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)........................................................ 103

Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals).............................................................................. 104

Form Overlay (Making Copies to Overlay Documents) .......................................................... 105

Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area) .................... 106

Stored Programming ................................................................................................................ 107

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy].

2 Select the [Job Assembly] tab, and then select a feature on the [Job Assembly] screen.

Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job)

This feature allows you to apply different copy settings to each document page or each document stack, and then outputs the copies as one job.Note • To copy on the tab paper when using [Covers], [Tab Margin Shift], [Separators], set [Output

Orientation] to [Face down].

1 Select [Build Job].

2 Select [On].

3 Select the desired print settings.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Build Job Off

Build Job is not applied.

Build Job On

Build Job is applied. The feature buttons appear. Set any item if necessary.For features available in Build Job, refer to "Features that can be set in Build Job" (P.99).

Features that can be set in Build Job

Copy Output

For information on the feature, refer to "Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)" (P.96).

Page 102: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

100

Co

py

3

Booklet Creation

For information on the feature, refer to "Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)" (P.75).

Covers

For information on the feature, refer to "Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies)" (P.78).

Important • The machine does not copy on a cover when using the Build Job feature.

Annotations

For information on the feature, refer to "Annotations (Adding a Stamp/a Date/Page Numbers to Copies)" (P.83).

Segment Separators

For information on the feature, refer to "[Segment Separators] Screen" (P.101).

Watermark

For information about the feature, refer to "Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies)" (P.89).

Secure Watermark

For information about the feature, refer to "Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)" (P.95).

Output Orientation

For information about the feature, refer to "Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down)" (P.94).

[Copy Job] screen

The following describes the screen that appears while the Build Job is being executed.

Change Settings...

Displays the [Copy] screen allowing you to change the settings. After changing the settings as necessary, press the <Start> button on the control panel to start scanning of the document.

When using a stored program for Build Job

While the machine makes copies using the Build Job feature, you can use a stored program.

1)Select [Change Settings...].

2)Select the [Job Assembly] tab.

3)Select [Stored Programming].

4)Select the number of the stored program that contains the features you wish to use.Note • You can only select numbers that have been registered.

For information on how to register a stored program, refer to "Registering Stored Programs for Build Job" (P.181).

Page 103: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Job Assembly

101

Co

py

3

Chapter Start...

Displays the [Build Job - Chapter Start] screen.Refer to "[Build Job - Chapter Start] Screen" (P.102).

Insert Separators...

Displays the [Segment Separators] screen.Refer to "[Segment Separators] Screen" (P.101).

Change Quantity...

Displays the [Build Job - Change Quantity] screen. Enter a new quantity using the numeric keypad.

Cancel

The document data stored by the Build Job feature is cleared and the job is cancelled.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <C (Clear)> or <Clear All> button on the

control panel.

• While scanning the loaded document, [Stop] is displayed. Select [Stop] to pause scanning. Select [Start] in the touch screen, or press the <Start> button on the control panel to resume scanning.

Last Original

Select this to end scanning of documents. The build job starts.

Next Original

Select this when you have another document. This item is selected when using the Build Job feature.

Start

When loading the next document and select [Start], the next documents are scanned.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.

Sample Job

When making multiple sets of copies, you can print a sample set to check the finished output and then print the remaining copy sets. You can select to continue or cancel the job after the confirmation.

[Segment Separators] Screen

You can insert a sheet of paper as a separator in between each stack of documents. You can specify the number of separators to insert within the range of 1 to 99 as necessary. Note • : You can specify different settings for each stack of documents. If you do not specify

particular settings for each stack of documents, the previously specified settings are applied.

1 Select any item.

2 Select [ ]/[ ] or use the numeric keypad to enter the number of separators to insert.

No Separators

The machine does not insert any separators.

Page 104: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

102

Co

py

3

Blank Separators

The machine inserts blank separators.

Select this feature, load documents, and press the <Start> button. The blank separators are inserted.

1 Sided Separator Side 1 Only

A first page of the loaded documents is copied on the front side of a separator, and the rest of pages are copied on the paper other than a separator.

When using [Multiple-Up], the number of pages (2 pages, 4 pages, or 8 pages) that you selected to copy onto one side of a single sheet, starting from the first page of the loaded documents, are copied onto the front page of a separator.

When loading a single sheet document, the document is copied onto a separator.

1 Sided Separator Side 2 Only

A first page of the loaded documents is copied on the back side of a separator, and the rest of pages are copied on the paper other than a separator.

When using [Multiple-Up], the number of pages (2 pages, 4 pages, 8 pages) that you selected to copy onto one side of a single sheet, starting from the first page of the loaded documents, are copied onto the back side of a separator.

When loading a single sheet document, the document is copied onto a separator.

2 Sided Separators

First two pages of the loaded documents are copied onto each side of a separator, and the rest of pages starting from the third page are copied onto the paper other than a separator.

When using [Multiple-Up], the number of pages (2 pages, 4 pages, 8 pages) that you selected to copy onto one side of a single sheet, starting from the first page of the loaded documents, are copied onto each side of a separator.

When loading two-sheet documents, both sheets are copied onto each side of a separator.Note • When you have two separate documents, a single sheet document and multiple sheet

documents, if you want to copy this single sheet document and the first page of the multiple sheet documents onto each side of a separator, when loading the multiple sheet documents, select [No Separator] under [Build Job - Separators]. If you do not select [No Separator], the machine processes these two documents separately under different separator settings, the single-sheet document is copied onto a separator, and the first page (or first two page) of the multiple sheet documents is copied onto another separator.

Segment Separator Tray

You can select the tray, which is loaded with paper to be used as a separator.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.57).

Separator Quantity

When selecting [Blank Separators], the number of separators can be set from 1 to 99.

[Build Job - Chapter Start] Screen

You can set the chapter start.

1 Select any item.

Off

The next stack of documents is copied after the previous stack.

Page 105: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Job Assembly

103

Co

py

3

On

The next stack of documents is copied from Side 1 of a new sheet of paper.

Multiple-Up - New Page

When [Multiple-Up] is marked, even if all documents are divided for every chapter before all of them are assembled in [Multiple-Up] feature, the next stack of document is copied using new sheets of paper.

Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)

When making multiple sets of copies, you can print a sample set to check the finished output and then print the remaining copy sets. You can select to continue or cancel the job after the confirmation. The number of sets to be copied can also be changed. The sample copy is included in the total number of sets.

After a sample set is output, the remaining sets will automatically be output if the machine is left uninstructed for the period specified under [Auto Job Release]. You can change the value of [Auto Job Release] as necessary.

1 Select [Sample Job].

2 Select [On].

Sample Job Off

No sample set is made.

Sample Job On

A sample set is made.

[Copy Job] screen

The machine pauses and displays the [Copy Job] screen after the sample set is copied.

Change Settings...

The [Change Settings...] screen is displayed. Uncheck the settings you want to cancel. This button is displayed only when there are any settings that can be cancelled for the job.

Page 106: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

104

Co

py

3

Change Quantity...

The [Change Quantity] screen appears and you can change the number of copies entered before. Enter a new quantity using the numeric keypad. The new value must include the number of the sample set that has already been printed. When reducing the quantity, you cannot enter a number less than the number of copies that have already been printed.Note • If you specify "1" for [Change Quantity] and then press the <Start> button, the machine will

not process the job.

Cancel

The remaining copies are cancelled.

Start

The remaining copies are made.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.

Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals)

Use this feature when you copy a document that has too many pages to be loaded into the document feeder at one time, or when you scan each document page using the document glass and have the machine process the pages as one job.

[Next Original] that is usually displayed while scanning documents with the document feeder is always selected in this mode. In addition, when using the document glass to scan documents, [Next Original] is also selected during scanning. If [Copy Output] is set to [Auto], the output is automatically sorted.When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].

After the first original set is copied, the screen will automatically return to the previous display if the machine is left unused for the period specified under [Auto Clear]. You can change the value of [Auto Clear] as necessary.

1 Select [Combine Original Sets].

2 Select [On].

Off

In the screen displayed during scanning documents with the document feeder with specifying Collated, [Last Original] is selected.

On

In the screen displayed during scanning documents with the document feeder with specifying Collated, [Next Original] is selected.

Original Orientation

Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Page 107: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Job Assembly

105

Co

py

3

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideways Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

[Copy Job] screen

The [Copy Job] screen is displayed when copying begins.

Cancel

The document data stored by [Combine Original Sets] is cleared and the copying is cancelled.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <C> button or <Clear All> button on the

control panel.

Last Original

Select this to end scanning documents.

Next Original

Select this when you have more documents to copy. This button is activated when the [Combine Original Sets] feature is used.

Start

Load the next document, and select [Start] to start scanning.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.

Form Overlay (Making Copies to Overlay Documents)

This feature scans the first page of a document as a form image, and overprints it on the copies of the subsequent pages.Note • If the machine is set to detect Secure Watermark, this feature may not be used depending

on the type of a form image. For details, contact our Customer Support Center. For details on Secure Watermark settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Secure Watermark" in the Administrator Guide.

Page 108: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

3 Copy

106

Co

py

3

1 Select [Form Overlay].

2 Select [On].

Off

A form image in the memory is not overlaid.

On

A form image in the memory is overlaid.

Delete Outside/Delete Inside(Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area)

This feature allows you specify the area to be deleted from an document image. 3 areas can be specified.

1 Select [Delete Outside/Delete Inside].

2 Select any item.

Off

No area is deleted.

Delete Outside

Deletes the outside of the selected area.

Delete Inside

Deletes the inside of the selected area.

Area Settings

Selecting [Area X] displays the [Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area X] screen.Refer to "[Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area X] screen" (P.107).

Originals

When the original document is a 2-sided document, specify from which side the specified area is to be deleted.

Both Sides

Applies the settings to both sides of the document.

Side 1 Only

Applies the settings to side 1 of the document.

Side 2 Only

Applies the settings to side 2 of the document.

Page 109: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Job Assembly

107

Co

py

3

Original Orientation

Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideways Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

[Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area X] screen

Set the area to be deleted. The area is defined by the rectangle formed between the points X1,Y1 and X2,Y2. The origin point is the top-right corner of a document.

You can specify a value within the range of 0 to 432 mm for the width (X) and the length (Y) in 1 mm increments.Note • Specify the 2 coordinates from the top right corner of the document.

• When specifying multiple areas, the specified areas can overlap each other.

• When [Reduce/Enlarge] is enabled, the specified area will be reduced/enlarged accordingly.

1 Select [Area 1].

2 Enter the value for X1 into [X1] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

3 Enter the value for Y1 into [Y1] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

4 Enter the value for X2 into [X2] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

5 Enter the value for Y2 into [Y2] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

Note • To change the coordinates you have entered, select [Next], move , and then enter the value again.

• If all of [X1], [Y1], [X2], and [Y2] are set to [0], the area will be invalid. If no other area is specified, the Delete Outside/Delete Inside feature cannot be used.

• If you select <C> button, the value with the mark is cleared.

Clear Area X

Clears the specified area.

Next

The mark moves to the next coordinate.

Stored Programming

This feature is the same as "Registering Stored Programs for Build Job" (P.181) in Chapter 7 Stored Programming. For details, refer to "Calling a Stored Program" (P.183).

Page 110: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due
Page 111: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

4 Scan

This chapter describes the basic scanning procedures and the scan features provided by the machine.To use the scan features, network settings are required. For information on the network settings, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Scanning Procedure .................................................................................110

Operations during Scanning .....................................................................117

E-mail........................................................................................................119

Scan to Mailbox ........................................................................................126

Network Scanning.....................................................................................127

Scan to PC................................................................................................129

General Scan Features.............................................................................133

Advanced Settings....................................................................................143

Layout Adjustment ....................................................................................146

E-mail Options/Filing Options ...................................................................152

Page 112: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

110

Scanning Procedure

This section describes the basic scanning procedure. The following shows the reference section for each step.

Step 1 Loading Documents .......................................................................................................110

Step 2 Selecting Features ..........................................................................................................112

Step 3 Starting the Scan Job......................................................................................................114

Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job Status ..........................................................................115

Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data ...............................................................................................116

Step 1 Loading Documents

There are two methods for loading documents:

Document Feeder

Single sheet

Multiple sheets

Document Glass

Single sheet

Bound documents, such as books

Document Feeder

The document feeder supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 140 x 210 mm (A5, 5.5 x 8.5 inches) to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).

The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.For information on entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying an Scan Size)" (P.148).

Note • The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information about paper size settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.

For information about copying mixed sized documents, refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.148).

Important • To avoid paper jams, use the document glass for folded or creased documents.

• Two sided scanning of lightweight paper 38 - 49 g/m2 is not supported.

Document Type (Weight)Number of

Sheets

Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) 250 sheets

Plain paper (50 - 80 g/m2) 250 sheets

Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 g/m2) 150 sheets

Heavyweight paper (129 - 200 g/m2) 100 sheets

Page 113: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scanning Procedure

111

Scan

4

1 Remove any paper clips and staples before loading the document.

2 Adjust the movable document guides to match the size of the document loaded.

3 Place the documents face up (when the documents are 2-sided, place the front side up) in the center of the document feeder.

Note • The indicator lights up when the document is loaded correctly.

• When documents are loaded into the document feeder, the document feeder tray lifts up. The timing of the lift can be programmed in [System Settings]. For more information, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Document Feeder Tray Elevation" in the Administrator Guide.

Document Glass

The document glass supports a single sheet, a book, or other similar documents up to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).Important • After using the document glass, close the document cover.

The document glass automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.For information on entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying an Scan Size)" (P.148).

Note • The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Open the document cover.

Important • Ensure that a screen is displayed on the control panel, and then load a document. If a document is loaded before a screen is displayed, the machine may not properly detect the document size.

CAUTION

Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the platen glass. It may break the glass and cause injuries.

Page 114: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

112

2 Place the document face down, and align it against the top left corner of the document glass.

3 Close the document cover.

Note • When a standard size document is placed on the document glass, the size of the document is displayed in the message area.

Step 2 Selecting Features

You can select features on the [E-mail]/[Scan to Mailbox]/[Network Scanning]/[Scan to PC] screen.

On the [All Services] screen, you can select from 4 scan modes: E-mail, Scan to Mailbox, Network Scanning, and Scan to PC.

E-mail

Scans a document and sends the scanned data as an e-mail attachment.

Scan to Mailbox

Scans a document and saves the scanned data into a mailbox on the machine.You need to create a mailbox in advance. For information on how to create a mailbox, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Setup" > "Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.

Network Scanning

Scans a document using a job template created on CentreWare Internet Services.

Scan to PC

Scans a document and sends the scanned data to a network computer via the FTP or SMB protocol.

The following shows the reference section for each feature.E-mail........................................................................................................................................119

Scan to Mailbox ........................................................................................................................126

Network Scanning.....................................................................................................................127

Scan to PC.................................................................................................................................129

Note • Features displayed may vary depending on the model of your machine.

• When the Auditron mode used, a user ID and passcode may be required. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.

• To use the scan features, network settings are required. For information on the network settings, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Page 115: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scanning Procedure

113

Scan

4

The following describes how to store scanned data into a mailbox.

1 Press the <All Services> button.

2 Select [Scan to Mailbox].

3 If the previous settings still remain, press the <Clear All> button.

4 Specify a mailbox to save the data in.

5 Select each tab, and configure features as necessary.

  

<All Services> button

  

<Clear All> button

Page 116: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

114

The following shows the reference section for each feature."General Scan Features" (P.133)

"Advanced Settings" (P.143)

"Layout Adjustment" (P.146)

"E-mail Options/Filing Options" (P.152)

Step 3 Starting the Scan Job

1 Press the <Start> button.

Important • If the document has been set in the document feeder, do not hold down the document while it is being conveyed.

• Scanning cannot be performed if a copy protection code is detected.

Note • If a problem occurs, an error message appears in the touch screen. Solve the problem in accordance with the message.

• The next scan job can proceed while scanning.

If you have more documents

If you have more documents to scan, select [Next Original] on the touch screen while the current document is being scanned. This allows you to scan the documents as a single set of data.

Up to 999 pages can be stored.Note • If the number of document pages exceeds the maximum, then scanning stops. Follow the

displayed message, and either abort the operation, or save the scanned data.

2 While documents are being scanned, select [Next Original].

Note • When the screen shown above is displayed and no operation is performed for a certain period of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents.

• When using the document feeder, load the next document after the machine has finished scanning the first document.

• You can change the scan settings of the next document by selecting the [Change Settings] button that is displayed after selecting [Next Original].

<Start> button

  

Page 117: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scanning Procedure

115

Scan

4

3 Load the next document.

4 Press the <Start> button. If you have more documents, repeat Steps 3 and 4.

5 When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].

Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job Status

1 Press the <Job Status> button.

2 Confirm the job status.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

<Job Status> button

Page 118: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

116

Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data

When you used the Scan-to-Mailbox feature, the document stored in a mailbox of the machine can be imported into your computer using the following:

Import using an application

Use a network scan driver.Refer to "Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application" (P.215).

Import using Mailbox Viewer 3

Use Mailbox Viewer 3 (Fuji Xerox application software).Refer to "Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3" (P.217).

Import using CentreWare Internet Services

Use CentreWare Internet Services.Refer to "Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.219).

Import using WebDAV

Use WebDAV.Refer to "Importing with the WebDAV Protocol" (P.220).

Page 119: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Operations during Scanning

117

Scan

4

Operations during Scanning

The following describes the operations available during scanning. The following shows the reference for each operation.

Stopping the Scan Job .............................................................................................................. 117

Changing Scan Settings............................................................................................................ 118

Stopping the Scan Job

To cancel scanning a document, follow the procedure below.

1 Press either [Stop] on the touch screen or the <Stop> button on the control panel.

2 Select [Cancel].

If the screen shown in step 2 does not appear even after you press the <Stop> button on the control panel:

Depending on the job in progress, a screen for canceling the job may not appear. In that case, use the following procedure to cancel the scan job on the [Current and Pending Jobs] screen in Job Status.

<Stop> button

  

Page 120: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

118

1 Press the <Job Status> button.

2 Select the job to cancel, and then select [Stop].

Changing Scan Settings

You can change scan settings while scanning the document.

1 Select [Next Original].

2 Select [Change Settings...].

3 Set [Color Scanning], [Resolution], [Original Size], [2 Sided Scanning], [Original Type], and [Lighten/Darken].

For details on the settings, refer to "Color Scanning (Selecting a Color Mode)" (P.133), "Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)" (P.146), "Original Size (Specifying an Scan Size)" (P.148), "2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.146), "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.135), and "Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness)" (P.144).

4 Press the <Start> button.

<Job Status> button

Page 121: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

E-mail

119

Scan

4

E-mail

You can scan a document and send the scanned data as an e-mail attachment. The following shows the reference section for each feature.Note • Some e-mail settings are required to use this feature. For information on the settings, refer

to "8 E-mail Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Address Book ........................................................................................................................... 119

New Repicient .......................................................................................................................... 122

Add Me..................................................................................................................................... 123

Recipient(s) .............................................................................................................................. 123

From ......................................................................................................................................... 124

Subject...................................................................................................................................... 124

Message.................................................................................................................................... 125

The [Read Receipts] and [Split Send] features on the [Output Format] screen are only available for the [E-mail] feature. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Read Receipts........................................................................................................................... 153

Split Send (Sending in Sections) .............................................................................................. 153

1 Select [E-mail] on the [All Services] screen.

2 On the [E-mail] screen, specify recipients using the Address Book or the keyboard.

Important • Recipients cannot be specified with address numbers using the numeric keypad, one-touch buttons, or group numbers.

• You can only specify recipients registered for e-mail.

• Depending on the settings in the System Settings, the [Address Book], [Keyboard], and [Add Me] buttons are not displayed. Recipient names and e-mail addresses cannot be modified on this screen.

• Depending on the settings in the System Settings, the address specified in the [From] field may not be automatically displayed in the [To] or [CC] fields.

Address Book

The following describes how to select a recipient using the Address Book.

When you select an address attached with a certificate from the Address Book, the e-mail can be encrypted.For information on the settings of the address book, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Setup" > "Address Book" in the Administrator Guide.

For information on the encryption, refer to "10 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" > "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" in the Administrator Guide.

Page 122: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

120

1 Select [Address Book].

2 From the [Address Books] list, select [List all public entries], [Search Public], or [Search Network].

List all public entries

Displays the local address list.Refer to "When [List all public entries] is Selected" (P.121).

Search Public

Searches recipients in the local address list.Refer to "When [Search Public] or [Search Network] is Selected" (P.121).

Search Network

Searches recipients in the remote address list.Refer to "When [Search Public] or [Search Network] is Selected" (P.121).

Name/E-mail Address

Lists names and their e-mail addresses.

To

Sets the selected address as a recipient.

CC

Sets the selected address as CC.

BCC

Sets the selected address as BCC.

Details

Displays detailed information on the selected recipient.

Show E-mail Address

Placing a check mark in the box displays only e-mail addresses in the list.

Page 123: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

E-mail

121

Scan

4

When [List all public entries] is Selected

1 Select a recipient from the local address list.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

When [Search Public] or [Search Network] is Selected

1 Enter keywords to search for an address.

For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.42).

Note • When multiple keywords are used, the address is searched with the AND clause.

Name

Searches with a recipient name as a keyword. Selecting [Keyword] displays the screen for entering the keyword. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

Example: John Smith

E-mail Address

Searches with an e-mail address as a keyword. Selecting [Keyword] displays the screen for entering the keyword. Up to 128 characters are allowed.Example: [email protected]

Custom Item

This field is used to search with a keyword item other than the recipient name and e-mail address. Selecting [Enter/Change Keyword] displays the screen listing the custom items.Note • Only one custom item can be selected.

None

No custom item is used for the keyword search.

telephonenumber

A telephone number is used for the keyword search.

o

An office name is used for the keyword search.

ou

A department name is used for the keyword search.

Page 124: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

122

Change Settings

Select a custom item, and select this button. Then the keyword entry screen appears. Up to 60 characters are allowed.

Keyword

Select a keyword item, and select [Enter/Change Keyword]. Then the keyword is set or changed.

Search

The search starts. The searched results are listed on the screen.

New Repicient

You can enter addresses using the keyboard.

1 Select [New Repicient] on the [E-mail] screen.

2 Use the keyboard shown on the screen to enter an e-mail address of up to 128 characters.

To/CC/BCC

Switches the recipient type (To/CC/BCC) using the drop-down menu.

+Add

Allows you to specify e-mail addresses to send e-mails to multiple recipients (Broadcast).

Search for names

Placing a check mark in the box searches for names.

Delete Text

Deletes entered text.

Backspace

Moves the cursor back to delete one character.

Shift

Used for entering uppercase characters.

More Characters

Displays symbols. Use this button to enter symbols for the e-mail address.

Page 125: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

E-mail

123

Scan

4

Add Me

This button is used to add the sender's address to [To], [CC], or [BCC].

1 Select [Add Me].

2 Select an option.

To

Adds the sender's address to To.

CC

Adds the sender's address to CC.

BCC

Adds the sender's address to BCC.

Recipient(s)

You can confirm, delete or edit recipients using the pop-up menu displayed.

1 From the [Recipient(s)] list, select the recipient to be deleted, confirmed, or edited.

2 Select any item from the pop-up menu.

Remove

Removes the selected recipient.

Edit

Displays the [Change Recipient Settings] screen where you can confirm or edit the recipient. Refer to "[Edit Recipient] Screen" (P.123).

Close Menu

Hides the pop-up menu.

[Edit Recipient] Screen

You can confirm and change the settings of the recipient.

1 Select the item to be changed.

E-mail Address

To change the e-mail address, select [Change Settings] to display the keyboard and enter a new address.

Page 126: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

124

Name

To change the recipient name, select [Change Settings] to display the keyboard and enter a new name.

The recipient name appears when registered in the Address Book.

S/MIME Certificate

To check whether or not any certificate is linked to the e-mail address, select [Change Settings].

If S/MIME is enabled, and a certificate is linked to the e-mail address, you can check the contents of the S/MIME certificate.For information on S/MIME communication, refer to "10 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" > "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" in the Administrator Guide.

Change Settings

Allows you to confirm and change the settings of the selected item.

From

Specify a sender's e-mail address. You can specify only one address as a sender's address.Note • When using the Authentication feature, the e-mail address registered in user information is

automatically set as a sender's address. For more information on user information, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Create/View User Accounts" in the Administrator Guide.

• Depending on the System Settings, [From] may not be editable.

• When using a digital signature, the machine e-mail address becomes the sender’s address.

For information on a digital signature, refer to "10 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" > "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [From].

2 Select any item from the pop-up menu.

Note • The machine e-mail address appears as a sender. If the machine name is set in [Name] in the System Administration mode, the machine name appears in [From] instead of the machine e-mail address. Select [From] to edit the sender’s e-mail address.

Address Book

Allows you to select the sender's e-mail address from the address book.For information on the address book, refer to "Address Book" (P.130).

Keyboard

Enter the sender’s e-mail address of up to 128 characters.

Close Menu

Hides the pop-up menu.

Subject

Set the e-mail subject using the following procedure.

Page 127: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

E-mail

125

Scan

4

Auto Set

Automatically sets the subject to [Scan data from XXX] (where XXX is the host name of the machine).

To set a user-defined subject

1 Select [Subject].

2 Enter a subject of up to 128 characters using the displayed keyboard.

For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.42).

Message

Enter the e-mail body using the following procedure.

1 Select [Message].

2 Enter a message of up to 512 characters using the keyboard.

For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.42).

Color Scanning

You can set the color mode to scan a document.For information about the feature, refer to "Color Scanning (Selecting a Color Mode)" (P.133).

2 Sided Scanning

You can automatically scan both sides of a 2-sided document.

By setting the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.For information about the feature, refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.134).

Original Type

You can select the type of the document.For information about the feature, refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.135).

File Format

You can select a file format for output data.For information about the feature, refer to "File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)" (P.135).

Page 128: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

126

Scan to Mailbox

You can scan documents and save the scanned data into a mailbox of the machine.

To use the [Scan to Mailbox] feature, select [Scan to Mailbox].A mailbox needs to be registered beforehand. For more information on registering a mailbox, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Setup" > "Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Scan to Mailbox] on the [All Services] screen.

2 On the [Scan to Mailbox] screen, specify a mailbox to save the scanned data in.

Note • If a passcode is set for the mailbox, the passcode entry screen may appear. Enter the passcode and select [Enter]. If you have forgotten the passcode, set the mailbox passcode in the System Administration mode again.

Mailbox

Select a mailbox to save the scanned data in.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen and select [ ] to move to the next screen.

Go to

Use the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit mailbox number. The mailbox then appears at the top of the list.

Document List

Select a mailbox and then select this button to display the [Document List] screen. You can confirm or delete documents stored in the mailbox.For more information on the [Mailbox - Confirm/Delete] screen, refer to "Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox" (P.161).

Color Scanning

You can set the color mode to scan a document.For information about the feature, refer to "Color Scanning (Selecting a Color Mode)" (P.133).

2 Sided Scanning

You can automatically scan both sides of a 2-sided document.

By setting the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.For information about the feature, refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.134).

Original Type

You can select the type of the document.For information about the feature, refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.135).

Page 129: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Network Scanning

127

Scan

4

Network Scanning

You can scan documents after specifying a file (job template) saving scanning conditions, information on the forwarding destination server and others.

Job templates can be created on CentreWare Internet Services. Scanned data is converted to the format specified in a job template, and is automatically sent to a server.

1 Select [Network Scanning] on the [All Services] screen.

2 Select a job template.

Job Template

Select a job template that has the scan conditions you want.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Go to

Use the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit job template number. The job template then appears at the top of the list.

Template Description

Displays the [Template Description] screen. The screen displays the description of the job template.

Update Template

Refreshes the information. If a created job template has not been displayed, selecting [Refresh] will display the job template.

Color Scanning

You can set the color mode to scan a document.For information about the feature, refer to "Color Scanning (Selecting a Color Mode)" (P.133).

2 Sided Scanning

You can automatically scan both sides of a 2-sided document.

By setting the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.For information about the feature, refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.134).

Original Type

You can select the type of the document.For information about the feature, refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.135).

Page 130: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

128

File Format

You can select a file format for output data.For information about the feature, refer to "File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)" (P.135).

Page 131: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan to PC

129

Scan

4

Scan to PC

You can convert scanned data to TIFF, DocuWorks, or PDF format, and then use the FTP or SMB protocol to send the data to a computer on the network. The following shows the reference section for each feature.Note • Before scanning, a shared folder must be created on the computer for saving scanned data.

If the FTP protocol is used, the FTP service must be set. For information on the computer settings, refer to the documentation supplied with your operating system. For information on compatible operating systems, refer to "13 Appendix" > "Specifications" > "Scan Feature Specifications" in the Administrator Guide.

• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Transfer Protocol...................................................................................................................... 129

Address Book ........................................................................................................................... 130

Browse...................................................................................................................................... 130

Specifying a Destination .......................................................................................................... 130

1 Select [Scan to PC] from the [All Services] screen.

2 Specify a forwarding destination on the [Scan to PC] screen.

Note • Fields displayed vary depending on the protocol.

Transfer Protocol

You can select a transfer protocol using the following procedure.

1 Select [Transfer Protocol].

2 Select any item.

FTP

Transfers using the FTP protocol.

SMB

Transfers using the SMB protocol.

SMB (UNC Format)

Transfers using the SMB protocol (UNC Format).

UNC stands for Universal Naming Convention and its format is as follows:\\host name\shared name\directory name.

Page 132: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

130

Address Book

You can specify the server name, user name and other information from the address book.For information on settings of the address book, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Setup" > "Address Book" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Address Book].

2 Select the destination in which data is to be stored.

3 Select [Add].

Important • You can only use destinations configured for SMB or FTP.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen and select [ ] to move to the next screen.

Name Protocol

Lists recipient names and protocols.

Add

Adds a selected recipient to the [Save In] box.

Save in

Displays a selected recipient.

Details

You can confirm information such as [Recipient Name] and [Server Name/IP Address].

Browse...

Displays a hierarchy consisting of server names and folders. You can specify a save destination by tracing the hierarchy.

1 Select [Browse...].

2 Select the destination in which data is to be stored.You can move to another level by pressing [Previous] or [Next].

Important • You can specify recipients for SMB only.

Save in:

Shows the current location in the hierarchy.

Specifying a Destination

Enter information into the fields provided for the selected protocol, to specify a forwarding destination.

When Scan to Home is enabled, the scanned document can be transferred to a different destination depending on the user logged in on the external device.

Page 133: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan to PC

131

Scan

4

Note • You can configure Scan to Home from CentreWare Internet Services.

1 Select the item to be set.

Note • You can also select [Address Book] to enter information.

• Fields displayed the screen vary depending on the protocol.

2 Enter information using the keyboard on the screen.

For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.42).

Note • To delete characters, select [Backspace].

Server

Displayed when [FTP] or [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol]. Enter a server name or IP address. Up to 64 characters are allowed.

Example::myhost.example.com(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)

Shared Name

Displayed when [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol]. Enter a shared name. Up to 64 characters are allowed.

Save In

When [FTP] or [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol]: Enter a directory name. Up to 128 characters are allowed.

When [SMB(UNC format)] is selected for [Transfer Protocol]: Enter "\\Host Name\Shared Name\Directory Name". Up to 260 characters are allowed.

User Name

Enter the user name of the computer you are forwarding to. When a user name is not required for the destination, this field can be skipped.

When [FTP] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], up to 32 characters are allowed.

When [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], use one of the following formats.

For Active Directory:

User name@Domain name (user name: up to 32 characters, domain name: up to 64 characters)

Example: [email protected] (fuji: user name, example.com: domain name)

For workgroups:

Local user (up to 32 characters)

Example: Fuji-Taro

Page 134: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

132

Password

Enter the password for the user name. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

Color Scanning

You can set the color mode to scan a document.For information about the feature, refer to "Color Scanning (Selecting a Color Mode)" (P.133).

2 Sided Scanning

You can automatically scan both sides of a 2-sided document.

By setting the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.For information about the feature, refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.134).

Original Type

You can select the type of the document.For information about the feature, refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.135).

File Format

You can select a file format for output data.For information about the feature, refer to "File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)" (P.135).

Page 135: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

General Scan Features

133

Scan

4

General Scan Features

The [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], and [Scan to PC] allows you to set basic features. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Color Scanning (Selecting a Color Mode) ............................................................................... 133

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ........................................................ 134

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) ........................................................................ 135

File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)............................................................ 135

Note • When you select [Scan to Mailbox], [File Format] is disabled.

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning] or [Scan to PC].

2 Select the [E-mail]/[Scan to Mailbox]/[Network Scanning]/[Scan to PC] tab, and select a feature.

Color Scanning (Selecting a Color Mode)

You can set the color mode to scan a document.

1 Select a color mode from [Color Scanning].

Auto Detect

The color of the document is determined automatically; the machine scans in full color when the document is colored, otherwise scans in monochrome.Note • The features which can be set in the [Advanced Settings] screen when [Auto Detect] is

selected, are the same as if [Color] is specified for the [Color Scanning] when a color document is loaded, or the same as if [Black & White] is specified for the [Color Scanning] when a monochrome document is loaded.

Color

Select to scan a color document.

Black & White

Scans a document in monochrome 2 tone. You can select the document type in the [Original Type].

Grayscale

Scans a document in grayscale. Adds shades to monochrome, creating intermediate tones that change gradually. Suited to documents containing gradations that cannot be reproduced with monochrome (2-color).

Page 136: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

134

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)

You can automatically scan both sides of a 2-sided document.

By setting the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.

1 Select any item.

1 Sided

Select this to scan only one side of the document.

2 Sided (Head to Head)

Select this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in the same orientation.

2 Sided (Head to Toe)

Select this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in opposite orientations.

More...

The [2 Sided Scanning] screen is displayed.Refer to "[2 Sided Scanning] Screen" (P.134).

[2 Sided Scanning] Screen

This screen allows you to select the status and orientation of original documents.

1 Select any item.

1 Sided

Select this to scan only one side of the document.

2 Sided

Select this to scan both sides of the document.

Originals

Displayed when [2 Sided] is selected.

Head to Head

Select this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in the same orientation.

Page 137: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

General Scan Features

135

Scan

4

Head to Toe

Select this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in opposite orientations.

Original Orientation

To scan using the document feeder, the orientation must be set to specify the head of the document.

Load the document in the [Head to Left] orientation when [File Format] is set to [TIFF/JPEG Auto Select], [TIFF], or [JPEG]. When viewing the scanned document on a computer, the document is displayed in the [Head to Top] orientation.Note • If the setting for [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the

machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideways Images

Select this when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or the document feeder.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)

When you set [Color Scanning] to [Black & White], select the document type.

1 Select an original type.

Photo & Text

Select this item when the scanning document contains both text and photos. This setting automatically identifies text and photo areas to scan each area with optimum quality.

Text

Select this item when scanning text clearly.

Photo

Select this item when scanning photos.

File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)

You can select a file format for output data.Note • When selecting [Scan to Mailbox], [File Format] is disabled.

• If High-compression Image Kit is installed, the machine can store PDF and DocuWorks files with higher compression rates.

Page 138: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

136

1 Select a file format.

TIFF/JPEG Auto Select

Automatically selects JPEG or TIFF. The file format is determined for each page: [JPEG] for full-color and grayscale pages, and [TIFF] for monochrome pages.

PDF

Saves scanned data in PDF format.

DocuWorks

Saves scanned data in DocuWorks format.Note • To browse or print DocuWorks files on a computer, one of the following software is required.

- DocuWorks 4.0 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light 4.0 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 4.0 or later

More...

The [File Format] screen is displayed.Refer to "[File Format] Screen" (P.136).

[File Format] Screen

This screen displays all available File Format options.

1 Select any item.

TIFF/JPEG Auto Select

Automatically selects JPEG or TIFF. The file format is determined for each page: [JPEG] for full-color and grayscale pages, and [TIFF] for monochrome pages.

mTIFF - Multiple Page per File

Saves multiple pages into a single file in TIFF format.

TIFF - File for Each Page

Saves each page into a different file in TIFF format.

Page 139: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

General Scan Features

137

Scan

4

JPEG - File for Each Page

Saves as a JPEG file. When either [Color] or [Grayscale] is selected for [Color Scanning], configure the image compression method. You can also configure the compression ratio with [Quality/File Size] in the [Output Format] screen.

PDF - Images Multiple Pages per File

Saves scanned data in PDF format.

DocuWorks

Saves scanned data in DocuWorks format.Note • To browse or print DocuWorks files on a computer, one of the following software is required.

- DocuWorks 4.0 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light 4.0 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 4.0 or later

XPS

Saves scanned data in XPS format.

Compression Method

Allows you to select a compression method for scanned image data.

MRC High Compression

Allows you to save PDF, DocuWorks, and XPS files with high compression, and also to attach thumbnails to DocuWorks files. A thumbnail is a reduced, small file image that helps you check the file contents.Important • Creating thumbnail images increases the size of the output data. Check the data size before

you send it by e-mail.

• DocuWorks 5.0.x and earlier versions (including trial version) do not support high-compressed DocuWorks files.

Note • Some models require an optional kit to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

• To browse or print DocuWorks files on a computer, one of the following software is required.- DocuWorks 6.0 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light 5.1 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 5.1 or later

Seachable Text

Select whether to perform character recognition in PDF and DocuWorks files.Important • Note the following when [Searchable Text] is set to [Searchable].

- When the text on the document is small (10 points or smaller), scan the document with high resolution (300 dpi).

- Color scanning is recommended when the document has outlined white text, or when it has text placed on a dark background.

- In the following cases, the Searchable Text feature may not function properly.

- If the document is not loaded correctly and thus the text is slanted, or if the text on the document is in different orientations

- If the text on the document is decorated (italic, hatching, strike-through, etc.)

- If the document has background patterns or noise

- If the text on the document is handwritten

Note • Some models require an optional kit to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

PDF Security

Allows you to prevent the data saved as a PDF file from unauthorized access.

Page 140: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

138

The [File Format - PDF Security] screen appears.Refer to "[File Format - PDF Security] Screen" (P.139).

PDF Signature

The [File Format - PDF Signature] screen appears.

A digital signature added to a file enables to detect alterations in the file, or to prevent impersonation of the sender.

To verify the signature with Adobe Acrobat, select [Digital Signatures] under [Preferences] on Acrobat, and then select the following option for [Signing Method].

- Acrobat 6.0.x : Windows Digital Certificate Security- Acrobat 7.0.x : Adobe Default Security

Off

No visible signature is added.

Visible Signature

Adds a visible signature using the certificate of the machine.

Invisible Signature

Adds an invisible digital signature using the certificate of the machine.

Signature Field Location

Select the position for [Visible Signature] where the signature is displayed.

Optimize PDF For Fast Web View

Optimizes the PDF file so that it is displayed faster on a web browser.

DocuWorks Security

Allows you to configure security on the data saved as a DocuWorks file to prevent unauthorized access.

The [File Format - DocuWorks Security] screen appears.Refer to "[File Format - DocuWorks Security] Screen" (P.140).

DocuWorks Signature

The [File Format - DocuWorks Signature] screen appears.

A visible signature added to a file enables to detect alterations in the file, or prevent impersonation of the sender.

Off

No visible signature is added.

On

Adds a visible signature using the certificate of the machine.

Signature Field Location

Select the position where the signature is displayed.

XPS Signature

The [File Format - XPS Signature] screen appears.

A visible signature added to a file enables to detect alterations in the file, or prevent impersonation of the sender.

Off

No visible signature is added.

Page 141: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

General Scan Features

139

Scan

4

On

Adds a visible signature using the certificate of the machine.

[File Format - PDF Security] Screen

Allows you to encrypt a PDF file by password, and assign the access privileges for the file operation.

1 Select any item.

Off

The file is not encrypted, and no access privilege is configured.

Password

Encrypts the file using a password.

Encryption Algorithm

Set the encryption method.

128-bit RC4

Encrypts by the 128-bit RC4 method. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with Adobe® Acrobat® 5.0 or later.

128-bit AES

Encrypts by the 128-bit AES method. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with Adobe® Acrobat® 7.0 or later.

Supported Version

The supported versions of Adobe® Acrobat® for encryption are displayed.

Document Open Password

The [PDF Security - Document Open Password] screen appears.

If you select [On] and set a password, the password is required to open the file.

You can enter a password up to 32 characters.

Permissions

The [PDF Security - Permissions] screen appears.Refer to "[PDF Security - Permissions] Screen" (P.139).

[PDF Security - Permissions] Screen

Allows you to assign access privileges to a file.

1 Select [Security Password].

2 Enter the password.

Page 142: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

140

3 Select any item.

Security Password

The [PDF Security - Security Password] screen appears.

Security Password allows to assign access privileges to files. The password is required when changing the access privileges or performing unauthorized operations.

You can enter a password up to 32 characters.

Printing

The [Authorization - Printing] screen appears.

Configure whether to allow to print the file. If allowed, select the print resolution as well.

Changes Allowed

The [Authorization - Changes Allowed] screen appears.

Configure whether to allow to change the file contents such as inserting pages or adding notes.

Allow Contents Copying and Extraction

The [Authorization - Allow Contents Copying and Extraction] screen appears. Configure whether to allow to copy the file contents such as text and images.

Text Editing by Screen Reader

The [Text Editing by Screen Reader] screen appears. Configure whether to allow to copy text and images on the file.

[File Format - DocuWorks Security] Screen

Allows you to encrypt a Docuworks file with a password, and assign the access privileges for the file operation.

1 Select any item.

Off

The file is not encrypted, and no access privilege is configured.

Password (V4 Compatible)

Encrypts the file by the 56 bit DES method using a password. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with DocuWorks Ver4.0 or later.Select [Open Password], and set a password.

Page 143: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

General Scan Features

141

Scan

4

Password (V4 Incompatible)

Encrypts the file by the 128 bit AES method using password. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with DocuWorks Ver5.0 or later.Select [Open Password], and set a password.

Digital Certificate (V4 Incompatible)

Encrypts the file by the 128 bit AES method using certificate. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with DocuWorks Ver.5.0 or later.Select [Certificate] to set a certificate.Important • If you encrypt a file using a certificate without Basic Constraints, DocuWorks Ver.5.0.1 and

Ver.6.0.1 cannot open the file. To use such certificates, use DocuWorks Ver.5.0.2, or Ver.6.0.2 or later.

Encryption Algorithm

Displays the encryption methods.

Restricted Operations

Select file operations to whom access privileges are assigned. When assigning access privileges, configure [Full Access Password].

Open Password

The [DocuWorks Security - Open Password] screen appears.

If you select [On] and set a password, the file is encrypted. To open the file, the password is required. The access privileges set in [Restricted Operations] are assigned.

You can enter a password up to 32 characters.

Full Access Password

The [DocuWorks Security - Full Access Password] screen appears.

When setting a password, the password is required to change the access privileges set in [Restricted Operations].

You can enter a password up to 32 characters.

Certificate

The [DocuWorks Security - Certificate] screen appears.Refer to "[DocuWorks Security - Certificate] Screen" (P.141).

[DocuWorks Security - Certificate] Screen

Select a certificate added to the file.

Remove

Deletes the selected certificates from the list.

Edit

Displays the [Change Settings] screen.

You can change the access privileges and confirm the certificate information.

Access Right

Allows you to change the access privileges to open or operate files.

Certificate Detail

The [Certificate Information] screen appears.

Page 144: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

142

Certificate information including issuer, expiration date, persons to whom the certificate is issued, and the like is displayed.

Cancel

Closes the pop-up menu.

Delete All

Deletes all settings of the certificate.

Add Device Certificate

If a valid certificate is linked to the machine, the machine certificate is added to the certificate list.

Add from Address Book

The [DocuWorks Security - Address Book] screen appears.Refer to "[DocuWorks Security - Address Book] Screen" (P.142).

[DocuWorks Security - Address Book] Screen

Allows you to select parties to whom the encrypted file is disclosed, and address to whom privileges are assigned.

Grant full access to this document

Displayed only when [List all public entries] is selected.

Configure certificates of persons who are allowed to change access privileges including editing or operating the file (full access).

List all public entries

Displays the local address list.For information on Local Search, refer to "List all public entries" (P.120).

Search Public

Searches recipients in the local address list.For information on Local Search, refer to "Search Public" (P.120).

Search Network

For information on Remote Search (Directory Svc.), refer to "Search Public" (P.120).

For information on Directory Service, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Remote Authentication Server/Directory Service" > "LDAP Server/Directory Service" in the Administrator Guide.

Name/E-mail Address

Lists names and their e-mail addresses.

Certificate Details

The [Certificate Details] screen appears.

Certificate information including issuer, expiration date, persons to whom the certificate is issued, and the like is displayed.

Add

Displayed only when [List all public entries] is selected.

Enter a recipient number using the numeric keypad to display the recipient on the list.

Page 145: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Advanced Settings

143

Scan

4

Advanced Settings

On the [Advanced Settings] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC], you can set the image quality features. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph) ........................................................................... 143

Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness).............................................. 144

Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting Contrast)...... 144

Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background) ............................................. 145

Color Space (Specifying Color Space)..................................................................................... 145

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning] or [Scan to PC].

2 Select the [Advanced Settings] tab, and select a feature on the [Advanced Settings] screen.

Note • [Color Space] is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. A setting must be made in the System Administration mode to activate [Color Space]. For information on the setting procedures, refer to "Color Space (Specifying Color Space)" (P.145) and "5 System Settings" > "Scan Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Color Space" in the Administrator Guide.

Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph)

Configure when scanning a color photograph.

This feature is only available when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color].Important • When this feature is enabled, [Shadow Suppression] and [Background Suppression]

features cannot be used.

Note • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.

1 Select [Photographs].

2 Select [Enhance Photographs].

Page 146: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

144

Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness)

You can adjust the scan density and image sharpness.

1 Select [Image Options].

2 Adjust the scan density and sharpness with [ ] and [ ].

Lighten/Darken

You can select a scan density level from among 7 levels between [Lighten] and [Darken].

Moving the arrow mark to the upper position makes the scan density lighter, and moving to the lower position makes darker.

Sharpness

You can select a sharpness level from 5 levels between [Soften] and [Sharpen].

Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the contours of images sharper, and selecting a lower cell makes softer.

Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting Contrast)

This feature allows you to suppress the background color of a document such as newspaper and colored paper. In addition, when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale], you can adjust the contrast.

1 Select [Image Enhancement].

2 Select [Background Suppression] and [Contrast]. Adjust contrast with [ ] and [ ].

Background Suppression

No Suppression

Scans the document backgrounds with no filtering.

Auto Suppression

When [Color Scaninng] is set to [Black & White], the background of a document printed on colored paper, such as newspaper, will be suppressed.When [Color Scaninng] is set to [Color], the background of a document printed on white-color paper will be suppressed.

Page 147: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Advanced Settings

145

Scan

4

Contrast

You can select a contrast level from 5 levels between [Least Contrast] and [Most Contrast].Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas greater; light areas become lighter and dark areas darker. In contrast, selecting a lower cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas smaller.

Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)

When you scan a 2-sided document printed on thin paper, this feature allows you to suppress the image and colors on the reverse side of each document page from appearing in the scan image.

This feature is enabled only when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale].Important • This feature cannot be used with [Photographs].

1 Select [Shadow Suppression].

2 Select [Auto Suppression].

Color Space (Specifying Color Space)

This feature allows you to set the color space.Important • Color Space is available when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color].

Note • To display [Color Space] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen, a setting must be made in the System Administration mode. For more information, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Scan Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Color Space" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Color Space].

2 Select either [Standard Color Space] or [Device Color Space].

sRGB

Uses the color space that conforms to sYCC.

Device Color Space

Uses advanced color settings.Note • You can find profile data in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.

• When [Device Color Space] is selected, the image quality features described below are changed to their defaults. Lighten/Darken, Sharpness, Shadow Suppression, Contrast, Background Suppression

• When [Color Scanning] is set to [Auto Detect], [Standard Color Space] is applied to color pages of the documents.

Page 148: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

146

Layout Adjustment

On the [Layout Adjustment] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC], you can adjust the scan options. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution) .......................................................................146

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document).........................................................146

Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages on Separate Sheets) ..................................................147

Original Size (Specifying an Scan Size) ...................................................................................148

Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) .......................148

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) .......................................149

Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)........................................................................151

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC].

2 Select the [Layout Adjustment] tab, and then select a feature on the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)

This feature allows you to set the resolution to scan a document.

As the value increases, the scan becomes more detailed, but the data size also increases. The scanning and transfer time increases as well.

1 Select [Resolution].

2 Select a resolution.

Note • If PDF file, DocuWorks file, and XPS file are set to MCR High Compression in the [File Format] screen, select from [200dpi] or [300dpi].

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)

This feature is the same as [2 Sided Scaninng] in the [E-mail]/[Scan to Mailbox]/[Netork Scanning]/[Scan to PC] tab. Refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.134).

Page 149: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Layout Adjustment

147

Scan

4

Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages on Separate Sheets)

This feature allows you to scan facing pages of a document onto separate sheets of paper in page order.

This feature is useful if you need to make separate scans for facing pages of bound originals such as a booklet.Note • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature. Use the document glass.

• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.

1 Select [Book Scanning].

2 Select any item.

Off

Does not scan as a bound document.

Left Page then Right

Scans the left page and then the right page of facing pages.

Right Page then Left

Scans the right page and then the left page of facing pages.

Top Page then Bottom

Scans the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages.

Both Pages

Scans both pages in page order.

Left Page Only

Scans the left page only in page order. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Right Page Only

Scans the right page only in page order. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Top Page Only

Scans the top page only in page order. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Bottom Page Only

Scans the bottom page only in page order. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Binding Edge Erase

Erases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Page 150: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

148

Original Size (Specifying an Scan Size)

This feature allows you to set the scan size for a document.

Use this feature when a document is a non-standard size, or when you want to scan a document at a size different from the original size.

The machine scans the document at the size you specify, regardless of the original size. You can add or delete unwanted margins using this feature.

1 Select [Original Size] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

2 Select a size.

Auto Size Detect

Detects the document size automatically.

Note • If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size appears.

• The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Standard Size

Select a document size from 17 options.

Variable Size

Enter the desired scan size when scanning a non-standard size document or when scanning at a size different from the original document size. You can specify a value in the range of 15 to 432 mm for the scan length (X), and a value in the range of 15 to 297 mm for the scan width (Y), in 1 mm increments. The scales attached on the upper and left edges of the document glass are helpful for you to specify values.Note • If PDF file, DocuWorks file, and XPS file are set to MCR High Compression in the [File

Format] screen, the range of sizes that you can specify differs. In these cases, the size can be specified in the range of 50 to 432 mm for the scan length (X) and 50 to 297 mm for the scan width (Y), in 1 mm increments.

Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)

When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously scan different size documents with the respective sizes. You can also specify a size to scan different size documents with the same size.

Document feeder Document glass

Document sizeB5, B5 , B4, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11 inches, 8.5 x 11 inches , 8.5 x 14 inches, 11 x 17 inches

B6, B6 , B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11 inches

Page 151: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Layout Adjustment

149

Scan

4

Important • When selecting [Color] for [Color Scanning], and [2 Sided] for [2 Sided Scanning], set the [Resolution] to a maximum of [400dpi].

• Always load the A5-size documents in portrait orientation.

• When loading B5 documents together with A3 documents loaded in landscape orientation or A4 documents loaded in portrait orientation, load the B5 documents in portrait orientation.

• The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5 portrait and B4 landscape. If another combination of document sizes is used, the documents can be fed at an angle and may not be copied properly.

Note • When [Reduce/Enlarge] is set to [Auto %] and the output size is specified for [Output Size], the scanned data is automatically reduced/enlarged to the specified size. However, since the scanned image is not rotated, the image will be reduced/enlarged to fit the specified size while keeping its orientation. For example, when an A3 landscape original is loaded and the output size is set to A4 portrait, the scanned image is reduced to A5 landscape and printed on A4 portrait paper.

• If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size appears.

1 Select [Mixed Sized Originals].

2 Select [On].

Off

Select this item when all documents are of the same size.

On

When scanning documents of different sizes, the machine automatically detects the size of each document.

Original Orientation

In order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the document must be configured.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideways Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document)

When you scan a document with the document cover open or when you scan a book, the edges and center margin of the document may be scanned as black shadows. The Edge Erase feature allows you to erase such shadows.Note • For 2-sided originals, the same edge erase amounts are set for the front and back sides.

• If you set [Reduce/Enlarge], the edge erase amounts will be reduced or enlarged in proportion to the ratio you configured.

Page 152: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

150

1 Select [Edge Erase].

2 Select [All Edges] or [Parallel Edges].

3 Use [ ] and [ ] to set the erase widths of top and bottom, left and right, and center of the document.

4 Select [Original Orientation].

All Edges

Sets the Edge Erase amounts to 2 mm for the top and bottom, and left and right edges.

If you do not want to erase edges, select [Parallel Edges] and then specify 0 mm for the required edges.

Parallel Edges

Allows you to specify Edge Erase values.

Top & Bottom

Erases the shadows of top and bottom edges of the document in accordance with the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Left & Right

Erases the shadows of left and right edges of the document in accordance with the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Center

Erases the shadow in the center of facing pages of a bound document. You can set the center erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Original Orientation

In order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the document must be configured.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideways Images

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

Page 153: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Layout Adjustment

151

Scan

4

Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)

This feature allows you to set the scanning ratio for the document to be scanned.

1 Select [Reduce/Enlarge].

2 Select or enter a ratio.

Proportional %

Select a preset ratio, or enter a value within the range of 25 to 400% in 1% increments.

To enter a value, touch the entry box, and then use the numeric keypad or the [ ] and [ ] buttons.

Enter Output Size

In [Output Size], select the output size of the scanned document. The machine automatically calculates the scanning ratio based on the selected output size and the original document size.Note • Selecting [Auto %] may generate blank

margin areas.

Page 154: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

152

E-mail Options/Filing Options

On the [E-mail Options]/[Filing Options] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC], you can configure the output formats. For more information, refer to below.

Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning) ........................152

Read Receipts............................................................................................................................153

Split Send (Sending in Sections)...............................................................................................153

File Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Sent)............................................................153

Reply To (Specifying a Reply Address) ...................................................................................154

File Name Conflict (Setting the Action to be Taken for File Name Conflict)..........................155

Document Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Saved)...............................................155

Encryption (Sending E-mail Encrypted by S/MIME)...............................................................155

Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME) ...............................156

Login Name...............................................................................................................................156

Password ...................................................................................................................................156

Meta Data..................................................................................................................................156

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC].

2 Select the [E-mail Options]/[Filing Options] tab, and then select a feature on the [E-mail Options]/[Filing Options] screen.

Note • The buttons displayed on the screen depend on the scan service selected on the [All Services] screen. The screen on the right is for the [E-mail] feature.

Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning)

This feature allows you to select an image compression level. The setting is effective when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale].

1 Select [Quality/File Size].

2 Adjust Quality/File Size with [ ] and [ ].

Note • If High-compression Image Kit is installed, and when [PDF High Compression] or [DocuWorks High Compression] is selected for [Output Format], three image compression levels are available.

Small File Size

The image is saved with low compression. Image quality improves, but the file size increases.

Large File Sise

The image is saved with high compression. Image quality degrades, but the file size decreases.

Page 155: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

E-mail Options/Filing Options

153

Scan

4

Read Receipts

This feature allows you to receive read receipts from e-mail recipients when using the [E-mail] feature. This feature is not available unless recipients support the MDN feature.Note • When multiple e-mails are sent using [Split Send], then a read receipt is requested for each

e-mail.

• Read receipts are returned to the address specified in [Reply To], or they are returned to the address specified in [From] if [Reply To] is not set.

• This feature is only available when the recipient also sets to return read receipts.

1 Select [Read Receipts].

2 Select [On].

Off

Select this item when you do not request read receipts.

On

Select this when you request read receipts.

Split Send (Sending in Sections)

When using the [E-mail] feature, you can split a large amount of attachment into pages to send them separately, or you can configure the machine not to split data.For information about the Split Send setting, refer to "5 System Settings" > "E-mail Service Settings" > "E-mail Control" > "Max No. of Pages for Split Send" in the Administrator Guide.

Note • [Split Send] is available only when the [File Format] is set to [PDF], [DocuWorks], or [Multi-page TIFF].

1 Select [Split Send].

2 Select [Split by page].

Off

The data is not split.

Split by Page

The data is split in pages.

File Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Sent)

When using the [E-mail] or [Scan to Mailbox] feature, you can specify a name for the document to be sent.

Page 156: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

154

Auto Set

The file name is "img-xxx-yyy.zzz" (where xxx is the date and time, yyy is the page number, and zzz is the extension).

The extension depends on the setting in [File Format].

When [Multi-page TIFF] or [TIFF] is set for [File Format]: tif

When [PDF] is set for [File Format]: pdf

When [DocuWorks] is set for [File Format]: xdw

To set the file name

1 Select [File Name].

2 Enter a name of up to 128 characters using the displayed keyboard.

For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.42).

Note • When each page is saved as one file, the page number is added to the end of each file name.

Reply To (Specifying a Reply Address)

When using the [E-mail] feature, you can specify the address for reply.Note • In one of the following cases, you cannot enter an address into the [Reply To] field:

- When an address for [Reply To] has already been obtained by using the remote authentication- When the machine does not allow you to change the address specified in the [From] field.

1 Select [Reply To].

2 Enter an address for reply.

[Reply To] box

Touching the [Reply To] box displays the keyboard screen allowing you to enter an reply address.

Clear

Deletes the address entered in [Reply To].

Reply To Me

Uses the address specified in [From] as a reply address.Note • This button is enabled only when an address is set for [From] on the [E-mail] screen.

Address Book

Allows you to select a reply address from the Address Book.Refer to "Address Book" (P.119).

Note • When using a job template, the template name becomes a file name, which cannot be changed.

Page 157: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

E-mail Options/Filing Options

155

Scan

4

File Name Conflict (Setting the Action to be Taken for File Name Conflict)

When using the [Scan to PC] feature, you can set the action to be taken when the file name conflicts with another file stored in the destination.

1 Select [File Name Conflict].

2 Select any item.

Do Not Save

The job is cancelled and the file is not saved.

Rename New File

The file name is automatically changed and saved. The machine adds a number (0001 - 9999) to the end of the file name.

Existing File

The existing file is replaced with the new one.

Document Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Saved)

When using the [Scan to Mailbox] feature, you can specify a name for the document to be saved.

Auto Set

The file name is "img-xxx" (where xxx is the date and time).

To set the file name

1 Select [Document Name].

2 Enter a name of up to 28 characters using the displayed keyboard.

For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.42).

Encryption (Sending E-mail Encrypted by S/MIME)

When using the [E-mail] feature, you can send e-mail encrypted by S/MIME.

When sending encrypted e-mail, select an e-mail address associated with a valid certificate from Address Book.

Off

Sends e-mail without encryption.

On

Sends e-mail with encryption.

Page 158: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Scan

4

4 Scan

156

Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME)

When using the [E-mail] feature, you can send e-mail with a digital signature by S/MIME.

Digital Signature allows a recipient to confirm whether contents of the e-mail are changed, or whether the e-mail is sent from the proper sender.

To use this feature, the machine's mail address must be linked to a certificate.For information on how to link a certificate to the e-mail address, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" > "S/MIME Certificate" in the Administrator Guide.

Off

Sends e-mail without a digital signature.

On

Sends e-mail with a digital signature

Login Name

Use this feature to enter the login name for a destination server.Note • This feature is displayed only when [Network Scanning] is selected on the [All Services]

screen.

1 Select [Login Name].

2 Enter the login name using the keyboard displayed on the screen.

For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.42).

Password

Use this feature to enter the password for a destination server.Note • This feature is displayed only when [Network Scanning] is selected on the [All Services]

screen.

1 Select [Password].

2 Enter the password using the keyboard displayed on the screen.

For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.42).

Meta Data

Use this feature to change the value of the Document Management Field (DMF) if it is specified for a selected job template.Note • This feature is displayed only when [Network Scanning] is selected on the [All Services]

screen.

Page 159: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

5 Send from Mailbox

This chapter describes the basic mailbox operation and mailbox features.

Mailbox Operating Procedure ...................................................................158

Selecting a Mailbox...................................................................................160

Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox...........................................161

Checking Document Details .....................................................................163

Printing Documents in a Mailbox ..............................................................164

Configuring/Starting Job Flow...................................................................167

Page 160: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

5 Send from Mailbox

158

Sen

d fro

m M

ailbo

x

5

Mailbox Operating Procedure

The following shows the reference section for each procedure.Step 1 Opening the [Send from Mailbox] Screen .....................................................................158

Step 2 Selecting a Mailbox .......................................................................................................158

Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ......................................................................159

Step 4 Operating Mailbox Documents......................................................................................159

Step 1 Opening the [Send from Mailbox] Screen

Follow the procedure below to open the [Send from Mailbox] screen.Note • Features displayed depend on the machine configuration.

1 Press the <All Services> button.

2 Select [Send from Mailbox].

Step 2 Selecting a Mailbox

Selectable mailboxes depend on the settings on the user authentication feature.For information on selectable mailboxes, refer to "11 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select a mailbox.

For information on the [Send from Mailbox] screen, refer to "Selecting a Mailbox" (P.160).

  

<All Services> button

Page 161: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Mailbox Operating Procedure

159

Sen

d fro

m M

ailbo

x

5

Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents

1 Select a document.

For information on the [Document List] screen, refer to "Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox" (P.161).

Step 4 Operating Mailbox Documents

The following shows the reference sections for operations available on the [Send from Mailbox] screen.

Checking Document Details..................................................................................................... 163

Printing Documents in a Mailbox ............................................................................................ 164

Configuring/Starting Job Flow................................................................................................. 167

Page 162: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

5 Send from Mailbox

160

Sen

d fro

m M

ailbo

x

5

Selecting a Mailbox

Selectable mailboxes depend on the settings on the user authentication feature.For information on selectable mailboxes, refer to "12 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" > "Types of Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select a mailbox.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen and select [ ] to move to the next screen.

• An arrow is displayed next to each mailbox which has a link to a job flow sheet and for which the auto start is set.

• If you are prompted for a passcode, enter a passcode and select [Enter].

Go to

Displays a mailbox at the top when you enter the three-digit mailbox number with the numeric keypad.

Page 163: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox

161

Sen

d fro

m M

ailbo

x

5

Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox

You can confirm or operate documents stored in a mailbox.

1 On the [Send from Mailbox] screen, select a mailbox.

2 Select a document.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

• You can sort documents in ascending or descending order by selecting either [Document Name] or [Stored Date].

• At the left of each document name, an icon is displayed to show the document type.

:Scanned document:Print document

• Up to 100 documents can be selected separately. You can also select all documents. If you select documents separately, a number appears to the left of the document icon indicating the order in which it was selected. Documents are processed in this order.

3 Select any item.

Refresh

Displays the refreshed information.

List

Lists the documents stored in the mailbox, with their stored dates and pages.

Thumbnail

Displays the images and names of the documents stored in the mailboxImportant • If power supply is cut off immediately after a scanned document is stored in a mailbox, or if

the hard disk space is insufficient to display thumbnails, documents in the mailbox may not be displayed in thumbnail view. In that case, display them in list view.

• The thumbnail view may not available for long documents. If a long document is not displayed in thumbnail view, display it in list view.

• Characters and images in thumbnail view may not be correctly displayed because they are scaled down from the actual sizes.

Note • The orientation of an image displayed in thumbnail view depends on which orientation the document was stored in.

• This feature may not be displayed depending on the machine configuration. Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Stored Documents

Displays the number of documents stored in the selected mailbox.

Page 164: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

5 Send from Mailbox

162

Sen

d fro

m M

ailbo

x

5

Select All

Selects all the documents in the mailbox. If [Select All] is selected again, all the documents are deselected.

Delete

Deletes the selected documents in the mailbox.

Document Details

Previews the selected document to allow you to check its details.For more information, refer to "Checking Document Details" (P.163).

Note • Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Job Flow Settings

Displays the [Job Flow Settings] screen. This screen allows you to create, link, and execute job flows.Refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.167).

Note • Job flows are not available for print documents. If print documents are included in the selected documents, a job flow can be executed for the documents other than the print documents.

Print

Allows you to print the selected documents.Refer to "Print" (P.164).

Batch Print

Allows you to print the selected multiple documents as one document.Refer to "Batch Print" (P.165).

Page 165: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Checking Document Details

163

Sen

d fro

m M

ailbo

x

5

Checking Document Details

You can preview a document to check its details.Important • Monochrome images with high gradation levels may appear bluish when previewed.

Note • Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 Select a document on the [Mailbox - Document List] screen.

2 Click [Document Details].

3 Select any item.

View Size

Select whether to display the whole page or to enlarge the image by 200%.

A small document may not be enlarged even if you select [Enlarge View].

Rotation

Select an angle to preview the image from [Right 90 degrees], [Left 90 degrees], and [180 degrees].

Change Document Name

Allows you to change the document name. Use the keyboard displayed to enter a new name.

Current Page

Specify a page to preview on the screen.

Page 166: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

5 Send from Mailbox

164

Sen

d fro

m M

ailbo

x

5

Printing Documents in a Mailbox

You can print selected documents in a mailbox.

1 On the [Document List] screen, select documents.

2 Select [Print] or [Batch Print].

3 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, if necessary.

4 Click [Print].

Note • When a document stored by [Save to Mailbox] of a print driver is printed, the settings specified on the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services will override the settings specified on the print driver except the [Multiple-Up], [Skip Blank Page], and print position settings.

Print

Configure the Print settings.

Paper Supply

Allows you to select paper.

2 Sided Printing

Allows you to set 2-sided printing.

Output

Allows you to set stapling and punching.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.

For examples of the settings of stapling and hole punching, refer to "When stapling/punching holes" (P.165).

Document Details

Displays the [Document Details] screen. Select a document from the list to check its preview image.For details on previewing a document, refer to "Checking Document Details" (P.163).

Note • Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Print

Prints the selected document.

Page 167: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Printing Documents in a Mailbox

165

Sen

d fro

m M

ailbo

x

5

Batch Print

Allows you to set batch printing.

You can print multiple documents as one document. Up to 100 documents can be bound in selected order. Note • For 2-sided printing, the last page becomes blank when the total number of printed pages is

odd. For printing of multiple documents, a blank page is inserted after the final page of each document.

• If a different size document is included in multiple documents, it may be printed in improper orientation.

• [Batch Print] is not available while interrupting another job.

Quantity

Allows you to change the quantity.

Paper Supply

Allows you to select paper.

2 Sided Printing

Allows you to set 2-sided printing.

Output

Allows you to set stapling and punching.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.

For examples of the settings of stapling and hole punching, refer to "When stapling/punching holes" (P.165).

Document Details

Displays the [Document Details] screen. Select a document from the list to check its preview image.For details on previewing a document, refer to "Checking Document Details" (P.163).

Note • Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Print

Prints the selected document.

When stapling/punching holes

The following table shows the stapled/punched positions with the example of [1 Staple] for stapling and [2 Holes] for punching for documents stored in a mailbox by specifying [Save to Mailbox] on a print driver and for scanned documents.

Page 168: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

5 Send from Mailbox

166

Sen

d fro

m M

ailbo

x

5

For documents in a mailbox stored by specifying [Save to Mailbox] on a print driver

For scanned documents stored in a mailbox

Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document, and the [Original Orientation] setting of [Edge Erase] or the [2 Sided Scanning] setting of [Layout Adjustment] tab, are the same.

Original

Stapling Position

Punching Position

Original

Original Orientation

Stapling Position

Punching Position

Report

Repo

rt

Report

Repo

rt

Report

Repo

rt

Report Report Report Report

ReportReport

Report Report

Report Report

Report

Report

Report Report

Report

Report

Page 169: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Configuring/Starting Job Flow

167

Sen

d fro

m M

ailbo

x

5

Configuring/Starting Job Flow

Job flow is a feature for executing a series of registered actions.

A job flow operates on documents stored in a mailbox, and starts in either of the following ways: 1) manually or automatically start a job flow when a document is stored in a mailbox, or 2) select a job flow to act on documents stored in a mailbox manually.

To automatically start a job flow, you must make a link with a mailbox and a job flow sheet in advance. Documents are automatically processed with the job flow sheet when they are stored in the linked mailbox.Important • If the Authentication feature is not used, a job flow created in [Send from Mailbox] can only

be used/edited/duplicated/deleted through the mailbox where the job flow is created. This type of job flow is not displayed on the [Job Flow Sheets] screen. When using the Authentication feature, job flows whose owners are authenticated are displayed on the [Job Flow Sheets] screen.

Features that can be registered are listed below.

Forward

Multiple forwarding recipients can be configured for each forwarding method.

FTP

Forwards via FTP. Up to 2 recipients can be specified.

SMB

Forwards via SMB. Up to 2 recipients can be specified.

Mail

Forwards via E-mail. Up to 100 recipients can be specified.

Print

Documents in a mailbox can be printed.

Some features are unavailable depending on the store type of the document.

O: AvailableX: Not available

1 On the [Document List] screen, select documents.

2 Select [Job Flow Settings].

OutputInput Print Mail FTP SMB

Scanning O O O O

Print Stored X X X X

Page 170: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

5 Send from Mailbox

168

Sen

d fro

m M

ailbo

x

5

3 Select any item.

Auto Start

This sets auto start of the job flow for documents stored in the mailbox. The job flow automatically starts when a document is stored.

Start Current Job Flow

Select documents from the mailbox and select this button to start the job flow linked to this mailbox.Important • After executing the job flow, print the job history report to check the result. For information on

the job history report, refer to "4 Machine Status" > "Machine Information" > "Print Reports" > "Job Status" in the Administrator Guide.

Cut Link

Cancels the link between a mailbox and the linked job flow sheet.

Create/Change Link

Displays the [Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] screen.Refer to "[Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] Screen" (P.168).

Select Job Flow Sheet

When selecting this button while documents are selected, the [Select Job Flow Sheet] screen is displayed.Refer to "[Select Job Flow Sheet] Screen" (P.170).

[Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] Screen

You can change the link between the mailbox and its job flow sheet.Note • Linking, delinking, and auto start settings can be also performed during the creation of a

mailbox.

1 Select a job flow sheet to link to.

Important • Selecting [Save] without selecting a job flow sheet does not set a link. If the selected job flow sheet is already linked, then the link is cancelled.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

• You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by touching either [Name] or [Updated].

• At the left of the name, an icon showing the target of the job flow is displayed.

:Mailbox Document

2 Select any item.

Save

Links the selected job flow sheet.

Page 171: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Configuring/Starting Job Flow

169

Sen

d fro

m M

ailbo

x

5

Search by Name

Searches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job flow names that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 128 characters long.For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.42).

Search by Keyword

Searches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation. For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.42).

Select Keyword

Displays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword registered in the system settings to search for job flows. Job flows that fully match the entry are searched. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation.

Sheet Filtering

Displays the [Sheet Filtering] screen.Refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.169).

Create

Displays the [Create New Job Flow Sheet] screen.Refer to "5 System Settings" > "Setup" > "Job Flow Sheets" > "Create Job Flow Sheet" in the Administrator Guide.

Edit/Delete

Displays the [Details] screen.For details, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Setup" > "Job Flow Sheets" > "Edit/Delete" in the Administrator Guide.

[Sheet Filtering] Screen

Filters the job flow sheets displayed.Displayed job flow sheets may vary depending on the user authentication feature. Refer to "11 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select the filtering conditions, then select [Save].

Note • The job flows that can be displayed on [Send from Mailbox] are those whose [Target] is [Mailbox], and those stored on the machine.

Owner

Allows you to select an owner.

Target

Allows you to select the target of the job flow sheet.

Page 172: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

5 Send from Mailbox

170

Sen

d fro

m M

ailbo

x

5

[Select Job Flow Sheet] Screen

You can select and modify job flow sheets associated with the mailbox.

1 Select a job flow, and press the <Start> button.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

• You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by pressing either [Name] or [Updated].

• At the left of the name, an icon showing the target of the job flow is displayed.

:Mailbox Document

2 Select any item.

Search by Name

Searches job flow sheet that partially corresponds with entered characters for registered names when job flow sheet is created. Up to 128 characters are allowed.For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.42).

Search by Keyword

Searches job flow sheet that fully corresponds with the keyword for registered keywords when job flow sheet is created.For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.42).

Select Keyword

Displays the [Select Keyword] screen. Searches job flow sheet by selecting keywords registered in the System Settings. Searches job flow sheet that fully corresponds with the keyword for registered keywords when job flow sheet is created.

Sheet Filtering

Displays the [Sheet Filtering] screen.For more information, refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.169).

Start

Executes the selected job flow sheet.

Details

Displays the [Details] screen.Refer to "5 System Settings" > "Setup" > "Job Flow Sheets" > "Edit/Delete" in the Administrator Guide.

Change Settings

If the selected job flow sheet setting is editable, the [Change Settings] screen appears. You can temporarily change the settings.

Job Flow Restrictions

A job flow sheet can be used by only one user, can be shared by multiple users, or can be used for only certain mailboxes.Job flow restrictions may vary depending on the user authentication feature. For more information, refer to "11 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

Page 173: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

6 Job Flow Sheets

This chapter describes the scanning operation using a job flow sheet created on a network computer and registered in the machine.

Job Flow is a feature for executing a series of registered actions.

Job Flow Sheets is a feature that allows you to register transfer settings of scan data, such as a transfer method and destination, to simplify data-transfer tasks.

Job Flow Procedure..................................................................................172

Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet......................................................174

Page 174: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

6 Job Flow Sheets

172

Job

Flo

w S

heets

6

Job Flow Procedure

Job flow sheets are categorized into two types according to the target. One type of job flow sheets targets scanned documents, and the other type targets documents stored in mailboxes. This chapter describes the first type of job flow sheets, targeting scanned documents.For details on the job flow sheets that target documents stored in mailboxes, refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.167)

This section explains how to select a job flow sheet and execute the job flow. Refer to the following sections for detailed steps.Job flow sheets are created and registered using a computer. For information on how to create and register them, refer to the manual stored on the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.

Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen ..........................................................................172

Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet ............................................................................................173

Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet.....................................................................173

Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet ...........................................................................................173

Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen

Follow the procedure below to open the [Job Flow Sheets] screen.

1 Press the <All Services> button.

2 Select [Job Flow Sheets].

  

<All Services> button

Page 175: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Job Flow Procedure

173

Job

Flo

w S

heets

6

Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet

1 Select a job flow sheet.

For more information on the [Job Flow Sheets] screen, refer to "Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet" (P.174).

Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet

1 To see the details, select [Details]. To change the settings, select [Change Settings].

For information on checking/changing job flow settings, refer to "Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet" (P.174).

Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet

1 Load the originals.

Note • A job flow sheet with application linkage does not require loading documents.

2 Press the <Start> button.

Important • After you press the <Start> button, the following message may appear on the screen. "Unable to start. The selected Job Flow Sheet contains incomplete settings."This message appears if you set [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] to [On] when creating a job flow sheet on a computer. Change this setting to [Off] to clear the problem.

• After executing the job flow, print the job history report to check the result. For information on the job history report, refer to "4 Machine Status" > "Machine Information" > "Print Reports" in the Administrator Guide.

Page 176: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

6 Job Flow Sheets

174

Job

Flo

w S

heets

6

Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet

Job Flow is a feature for executing a series of registered actions.

To use a job flow sheet whose target is scanned documents from a network computer with CentreWare EasyOperator, select the job flow sheet from this list.Important • If characters not supported by the machine are used in names or description of job flow

sheets, the characters will not be displayed or will be garbled on the screen. For information on characters that can be used in names or description of job flow sheets, refer to "13 Appendix" > "Notes and Restrictions" > "Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine" in the Administrator Guide.

Note • To communicate with network computers, [SOAP Port] must be enabled on the machine.

• A job flow sheet created on a network computer can be deleted, but cannot be changed or copied.

For information on how to enable the port, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Port Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select a job flow sheet.

Note • Displayed job flow sheets may vary depending on the user authentication feature.For more information, refer to "11 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

• You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by selecting either [Name] or [Last Updated].

Refresh

Displays refreshed information.

Details

The [Details] screen appears. Allows you to confirm the detail information.Note • Some operations may be restricted according to types of job flow owners, authentication

settings, and user types. For more information, refer to "11 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

Change Settings

Displays the [Change Settings] screen. Allows you to change the job flow settings.Refer to "[Change Settings] Screen" (P.175).

Search by Name

Searches job flow sheet names registered when it is created. The job flow sheets whose name includes the entered character string are displayed. Up to 128 characters are allowed to enter.

Search by Keyword

Searches job flow sheet by keywords registered when created. The job flow sheets whose keyword completely matches with the entered character string are displayed. Up to 12 characters are allowed to enter.

Page 177: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet

175

Job

Flo

w S

heets

6

Select Keyword

The [Select Keyword] screen is displayed. Searches job flow sheets by selecting the keywords that have already been registered in [System Settings]. Searches job flow sheet by keywords registered when created. The job flow sheets whose keyword completely matches with the selected character string are displayed.

Sheet Filtering

Displays the [Sheet Filtering] screen allowing you to filter the job flow sheets displayed.For more information on this screen, refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.175).

[Change Settings] Screen

1 Select a group to be changed from [Group of Items].

2 Select the item to be changed.

Note • A triangle icon appears at the left of each mandatory item.

Items

The items set for the job flow sheet.

Current Settings

The values set for the job flow sheet.

Previous Group

Displays the items of the previous group.

Next Group

Displays the items of the next group.

Add E-mail Recipient

Adds recipients for the e-mail.

[Sheet Filtering] Screen

Filters the job flow sheets displayed. Job flow sheets displayed on the screen depend on the settings of the Authentication feature.Displayed job flow sheets may vary depending on the user authentication feature. For more information, refer to "11 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

Page 178: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

6 Job Flow Sheets

176

Job

Flo

w S

heets

6

1 Select the filtering conditions, then select [Save].

Owner

Select an owner of job flow sheets displayed on the screen.

Target

Select a target for the job flow sheet.Note • Job flow sheets whose [Job Flow Target] is [Mailbox] can use Send from Mailbox only.

Page 179: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

7 Stored Programming

This chapter describes the Stored Programming feature that enables you to store customized job settings.

Stored Programming Overview.................................................................178

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs....................................179

Calling a Stored Program .........................................................................183

Page 180: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

7 Stored Programming

178

Sto

red P

rog

ramm

ing

7

Stored Programming Overview

This feature allows you to store settings that you expect to use frequently and call them with a single button operation. You can also assign a screen to a stored program button, to use the button as a short-cut to the screen.

A stored program can store not only settings of a feature, but a flow of settings configured on multiple screens.

For example, this feature is available when you want to record a procedure starting from pressing the <Machine Status> button, to displaying the [Report Job] screen to print a job history report.

In addition, while Build Job is running, this feature can be used for the remaining document stacks.For information on Build Job, refer to "Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job)" (P.99).

The following shows the reference section for each feature.Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs ....................................................................179

Calling a Stored Program..........................................................................................................183

Page 181: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs

179

Sto

red P

rog

ramm

ing

7

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs

The [Stored Programming] screen allows you to register and delete stored programs.Important • When registering a stored program to select paper size or type loaded on the bypass tray,

register both the paper size and the paper type. If only the paper size or type is registered, the stored program may not be called properly.

• If any of the following operations is performed while a stored program is being registered, the stored program may not be registered or may not work correctly.- Removing or inserting a paper tray- Loading or reloading paper on the bypass tray

• If any of the following operations is performed after a stored program registration, the registered stored program may not be called properly.- If the stored program has the Watermark feature and the Watermark value is changed. - If any registered feature becomes disabled due to its value change under System Settings.- If the stored program has an operation for a mailbox and the mailbox passcode is changed.

Note • Any services that are set using the following cannot be registered: System Settings, [Browse...] under Scan to PC, Job Flow Sheets, Network Scanning, Address Book, and other stored programs.

• A stored program registration is cancelled when the <Interrupt> button is pressed, the Auto Clear feature causes a time-out, or a popup window (such as a paper jam window) appears.

1 Press the <All Services> button.

2 Select [Setup].

3 Select [Stored Programming].

4 Select the feature.

Store

Register a stored program.Refer to "Registering Stored Programs" (P.180).

Page 182: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

7 Stored Programming

180

Sto

red P

rog

ramm

ing

7

Store Build Job

Register a stored program for Build Job.Refer to "Registering Stored Programs for Build Job" (P.181).

Delete

Deletes a stored program.Refer to "Deleting Stored Programs" (P.181).

Enter/Change Name

Enter or change a stored program name.Refer to "Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name" (P.182).

Assign/Change Icon

Configure an icon for a registered stored program.Refer to "Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs" (P.182).

Registering Stored Programs

Up to 100 actions can be registered with one stored program. Up to 40 stored programs can be registered in the machine.

The following is the procedure for registering actions with stored programs.Important • If registered settings such as tray paper size and comments, or default values in the system

settings are changed after a stored program is registered, then the program's content also changes.

Note • Services using System Settings, Job Flow Sheet, Network Scanning, or Address Book cannot be registered.

• The registering procedure for a stored program is cancelled when the <Interrupt> button is pressed, the Auto Clear feature causes a time-out, or a popup window (paper jam, etc.) appears.

1 Select [Store].

2 Select the number to register.

Note • Once a job is stored to a button, it cannot be overwritten.

• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

3 Set the feature you want to register.

Note • Press the <Interrupt> button to cancel registration.

• The machine produces an audible tone while a stored program is registered.

You can change the volume of the sound that notifies of stored program registration. For information on the settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Stored Programming Tone" in the Administrator Guide.

4 Press the <Start> button or <Clear All> button.

Note • If no name is entered for a registered stored program, the name becomes "No Name".

For information on how to name a registered stored program, refer to "Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name" (P.182).

Page 183: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs

181

Sto

red P

rog

ramm

ing

7

Registering Stored Programs for Build Job

Up to 100 actions can be registered with one stored program for Build Job. Up to 40 stored programs can be registered in the machine.

The following is the procedure for registering actions with stored programs.

1 Select [Store Build Job].

2 Select a number to register a stored program.

Note • Once a job is stored to a button, it cannot be overwritten.

• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

3 Set the feature you want to register.

Note • The machine produces an audible tone while a stored program is registered.

You can change the volume of the sound that notifies of stored program registration. For information on the settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Stored Programming Tone" in the Administrator Guide.

4 Press the <Start> button or <Clear All> button.

Note • At the left of a stored program for Build Job on the list, the icon is displayed.

• If no name is entered for a registered stored program, the name becomes “No Name”.

For information on how to name a registered stored program, refer to "Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name" (P.182).

Deleting Stored Programs

The following is the procedure for deleting stored programs.

1 Select [Delete].

2 Select the number to delete.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

3 Select [Delete].

Delete

Deletes the stored program.Note • Deleted stored programs cannot be

restored.

Cancel

Cancels deleting the stored program.

Page 184: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

7 Stored Programming

182

Sto

red P

rog

ramm

ing

7

Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name

The following is the procedure for entering or changing the name of a stored program.

Up to 36 characters are allowed for a stored program's name.For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.42).

1 Select [Enter/Change Name].

2 Select the number to register or change a name.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

3 Enter a name, and select [Save].

Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs

The following is the procedure for assigning or changing an icon of a stored program.

12 icons are available.

1 Select [Assign/Change Icon].

2 Select the number to assign or change an icon.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

3 Select an icon, and select [Save].

No Icon

No icon is assigned to a registered stored program.

Icon

Select an icon according to the content of the registered stored program.

Page 185: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Calling a Stored Program

183

Sto

red P

rog

ramm

ing

7

Calling a Stored Program

This describes the procedure for calling a stored program.

When calling a specified stored program, the last screen shown when you registered the stored programming appears.

1 Press the <All Services> button.

2 Select [Stored Programming].

3 Select the number of a stored program containing the features you want to use.

Note • You can only select registered numbers.

• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

4 After the stored program is called, select other features if necessary.

5 Press the <Start> button.

  

<All Services> button

<Start> button

  

Page 186: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

7 Stored Programming

184

Sto

red P

rog

ramm

ing

7

Calling a Stored Program for Build Job

You can call a stored program for Build Job on the [Copy] screen displayed while Build Job is running.

1 Select [Change Settings...].

2 Select the [Job Assembly] tab.

3 Select [Stored Programming].

4 Select a number of a stored program containing the features you want to use.

Note • You can only select registered numbers.

Page 187: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

8 Web Applications

This chapter describes the operations when the Remote Access Kit (optional) is installed.

Web Applications ......................................................................................186

Accessing Web Applications.....................................................................187

Page 188: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

8 Web Applications

186

Web

Ap

plicatio

ns

8

Web Applications

You can access web applications to store scanned document in folders or print stored files.

The machine offers the following features:

Allows you to access web applications from the machine, and displays the web application screen on the machine

Allows you to store the scanned document directly in a web application folder

Allows you to print a file that is stored on a server directly

Note • The web applications that can be displayed on the machine are those, which are compatible with the machine. You cannot access website on the Internet.

To access the web application on the machine, you need to configure the settings in advance. For information on web application settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Web Applications Service Setup" in the Administrator Guide.

Page 189: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Accessing Web Applications

187

Web

Ap

plicatio

ns

8

Accessing Web Applications

To access web applications, follow the procedure below.

An access destination must be registered in advance. For information on how to register an access destination, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Web Applications Serivce Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Press the <All Services> button.

2 Select [Web Applications].

Note • If Auto Jump Destination has been set, the machine access the remote service.

3 Select an access destination.

4 Select [open] on the pop-up menu displayed.

Open

Accesses the specified remote service.

Details

Displays the information of the specified remote service.

Close Menu

Hides the pop-up menu.

  

<All Services> button

Page 190: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due
Page 191: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

9 Job Status

This chapter describes the job status feature.

Job Status Overview.................................................................................190

Checking Current/Pending Jobs ...............................................................191

Checking Completed Jobs........................................................................193

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents..................................................194

Printing Pending Jobs...............................................................................203

Handling Error Terminations.....................................................................204

Page 192: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

9 Job Status

190

Job

Statu

s

9

Job Status Overview

The job status feature allows you to check current, pending, and completed jobs. You can also cancel printing and print pending jobs.

1 Press the <Job Status> button.

You can do the following on the [Job Status] screen.

Checking Current/Pending Jobs

Lists current and pending jobs, and displays their details. Also allows you to cancel current or pending jobs.For more information, refer to "Checking Current/Pending Jobs" (P.191).

Checking Completed Jobs

Displays the status of completed jobs. Also displays their details.For more information, refer to "Checking Completed Jobs" (P.193).

Checking Stored Documents

Prints or deletes documents stored using the Charge Print, Secure Print, Private Charge Print, Sample Set, and Delayed Print features.For more information, refer to "Printing and Deleting Stored Documents" (P.194).

<Job Status> button

Page 193: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Checking Current/Pending Jobs

191

Job

Statu

s

9

Checking Current/Pending Jobs

This section describes how to check current or pending jobs. On the status screen, you can cancel or preferentially execute jobs.

1 Press the <Job Status> button.

2 Check the current/pending jobs.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

3 Select the job to be cancelled or preferentially executed.

4 Select [Cancel] or [Promote Job].

Print Waiting Jobs

Select this to print the jobs that are waiting to be output.For more information, refer to "Printing Pending Jobs" (P.203).

Display Time

The estimated job completion time is displayed. The time is displayed either in the form of Cumulative Time Required or Time Required.The information to displayed can be changed. For more information about the settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Common Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Estimated Job Time" in the Administrator Guide.

Cancel

Cancels the current or pending job.

Promote Job

Preferentially executes the selected job.A [ ] will be marked on the [Status] of the job set to [Promote Job].

Stop

Stops the job processing.

Last Original

Select this to end scanning of documents. The job is then executed.

Next Original

Select this when you have another document to scan.

Page 194: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

9 Job Status

192

Job

Statu

s

9

Start

Resumes the stopped job.

Page 195: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Checking Completed Jobs

193

Job

Statu

s

9

Checking Completed Jobs

This section describes how to check completed jobs.

You can check whether a job has been completed successfully. Also, you can select a job to see the details.

1 Press the <Job Status> button.

2 Select the [Completed Jobs] tab.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

3 Select a job to see the details.

4 Select [Close] after the check.

Group Parent Jobs

Allows you to check the list or history of related jobs (such as job flow jobs).

Show Children Jobs

Displays a job list.

Print this Job History Report

Prints the job results to allow you to check the job history.

Print this Job Report

Prints a job status information report.

Page 196: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

9 Job Status

194

Job

Statu

s

9

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents

This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Secure Print or Sample Set feature, or stored with the charge print receiving control. The [Job Status] screen allows you to print or delete stored documents.

The following shows the reference section for each item.Secure Print ...............................................................................................................................194

Sample Set.................................................................................................................................196

Delayed Print.............................................................................................................................197

Charge Print ..............................................................................................................................198

Private Charge Print ..................................................................................................................200

1 Press the <Job Status> button.

2 Select the [Secure Print Jobs & More] tab.

Note • The buttons displayed on the screen vary depending on the settings related to the Private Charge Print feature.

For more information, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Secure Print

This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Secure Print feature.For information on secure print operations, refer to the print driver's help.

Note • This feature is not displayed when the Private Charge Print feature is enabled by using one of the following procedures:- Select [Save in Private Charge Print] under [Receive Control].- Select [According to Print Auditron] under [Receive Control], and then set [Job Login Success] to [Save in Private Charge Print]. Under [Login Setup / Auditron Mode], select an option other than [Off], and then set [Print Service] under [Auditron Mode] to [On].

• When you have selected [Save in Private Charge Print] or [Save in Charge Print] for [Receive Control] under [Charge/Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Secure Print] under [Secure Print Jobs & More] even if you select [Secure Print] on the print driver.

For more information, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Secure Print].

2 Enter the User ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed, and select [Enter].

3 Select [Charge Print].

Page 197: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents

195

Job

Statu

s

9

4 Select the user to be checked, and select [Document List].

Note • Select [Refresh] to display the updated information.

• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

• Entering a 3-digit billing ID with the numeric keypad specifies the user directly.

5 Enter the passcode, and select [Confirm].

Note • If no passcode is assigned, the passcode entry screen will not appear.

6 Select the document to be printed or deleted.

7 When printing, specify the number of print using the numeric keypad.

8 Select any item.

Select All

Selects all documents. To deselect all the documents, select this button again.

Delete

Deletes the selected document.Note • If documents with the same Billing ID are all deleted, the Billing ID will be deleted.

Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.195).

Print

Prints the selected document.Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.196).

When [Delete] is Selected

1 Select [Yes].

Yes

Deletes the document.Important • Once the document is deleted, it cannot

be restored.

No

Cancels deleting the document.

Page 198: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

9 Job Status

196

Job

Statu

s

9

When [Print] is Selected

1 Select what to do with the document after printing.

Print and Delete

Starts printing the document. After printing, deletes the document.

Print and Save

Starts printing the document. After printing, the document remains undeleted.

Cancel

Cancels printing the document.

Sample Set

This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Sample Set feature.

After a sample copy is output, the remaining copies will automatically be output if the machine is left uninstructed for the period specified under [Auto Job Release]. You can change the value of [Auto Job Release] as necessary. For information on Sample Set operations, refer to the print driver's help.

Note • When you have selected [Save in Private Charge Print] or [Save in Charge Print] for [Receive Control] under [Charge/Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Sample Set] under [Secure Print Jobs & More] even if you select [Sample Set] on the print driver.

For more information, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Sample Set].

2 Select the user to be checked, and select [Document List].

Note • Select [Refresh] to display the updated information.

• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

• Entering a 3-digit user ID with the numeric keypad specifies the user directly.

3 Select the document to be printed or deleted.

4 Select any item.

Page 199: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents

197

Job

Statu

s

9

Select All

Selects all documents. To deselect all the documents, select this button again.

Delete

Deletes the selected document.Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.197).

Print

Prints a Sample Set document. After printing the remaining sets of the document, the stored Sample Set document is deleted.Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.197)

When [Delete] is Selected

1 Select [Yes].

Yes

Deletes the document.Important • Once the document is deleted, it cannot

be restored.

No

Cancels deleting the document.

When [Print] is Selected

1 Select [Yes].

Yes

Starts printing the document. After printing, deletes the document.

No

Cancels printing the document.

Delayed Print

This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Delayed Print feature.For information on Delayed Print operations, refer to the print driver's help.

Note • When you have selected [Save in Private Charge Print] or [Save in Charge Print] for [Receive Control] under [Charge/Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Delayed Print] under [Secure Print Jobs & More] even if you select [Delayed Print] on the print driver.

For more information, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Delayed Print].

Page 200: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

9 Job Status

198

Job

Statu

s

9

2 Select the document to be printed or deleted.

Note • Select [Refresh] to display the updated information.

• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

• [Print Time] shows the time to start printing.

3 Select any item.

Delete

Deletes the selected document.Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.198).

Print

Prints the selected document. After printing, deletes the document. If printed manually, the document will not be printed at the specified time.Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.198).

When [Delete] is Selected

1 Select [Yes].

Yes

Deletes the document.Important • Once the document is deleted, it cannot

be restored.

No

Cancels deleting the document.

When [Print] is Selected

1 Select [Yes].

Yes

Starts printing the document. After printing, deletes the document.

No

Cancels printing the document.

Charge Print

When you set to use the Charge Print feature under [Charge/Private Print Settings] > [Receive Control], received print jobs are saved for each Billing ID. Any jobs that were not given a Billing ID on the print driver are saved in [No User ID].For more information, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Page 201: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents

199

Job

Statu

s

9

The following describes how to print and delete a document saved in Charge Print.

1 When printing the stored jobs, the authentication is required. Press the <Log In/Out> button. Enter the target user ID using the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed by pressing [Keyboard], and select [Confirm].When deleting the stored jobs, the authenticaiton in not required.

2 Select [Charge Print].

3 Select the user to be checked, and select [Document List].

Note • Select [Refresh] to display the updated information.

• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

• Entering a 3-digit user ID with the numeric keypad specifies the user directly.

4 Enter the passcode, and select [Confirm].

Note • If no passcode is assigned, the passcode entry screen will not appear.

5 Select the document to be printed or deleted.

6 When printing, specify the number of print using the numeric keypad.

7 Select any item.

Delete

Deletes the document stored with Charge Print.Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.200).

Print

Prints the document stored with Charge Print.Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.200).

Page 202: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

9 Job Status

200

Job

Statu

s

9

When [Delete] is Selected

1 Select [Yes].

Yes

Deletes the document.Important • Once the document is deleted, it cannot

be restored.

No

Cancels deleting the document.

When [Print] is Selected

1 Select what to do with the document after printing.

Print and Delete

Starts printing the document. After printing, deletes the document.

Print and Save

Starts printing the document. After printing, the document remains undeleted.

Cancel

Cancels printing the document.

Private Charge Print

When you set to use the Private Charge Print feature, received print jobs are saved for each authentication user ID.Note • This item is displayed when the Private Charge Print feature is enabled by using one of the

following procedures:- Select [Save in Private Charge Print] under [Receive Control].- Select [According to Print Auditron] under [Receive Control], and then set [Job Login Success] to [Save in Private Charge Print]. Under [Login Setup / Auditron Mode], select an option other than [Off], and then set [Print Service] under [Auditron Mode] to [On].

• When deleting the print job instructed with an invalid user ID, display the list of print jobs in the authenticated system administrator mode, and then select the job to be deleted.For more information, refer to "Deleting the Print Job with an Invalid User ID" (P.202)

For more information, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

The following describes how to print or delete a document stored with the Private Charge Print feature.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

Page 203: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents

201

Job

Statu

s

9

2 Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed, and select [Enter].

3 Select [Private Charge Print].

Note • If you are authenticated as a system administrator, selecting [Private Charge Print] will display a list of authentication user IDs. Select a user ID from the list, and then select [Document List] to display a list of documents stored for the selected user.

4 Select the document to be printed or deleted.

5 When printing, specify the number of print using the numeric keypad.

6 Select any item.

Select All

Selects all documents. To deselect all the documents, select this button again.

Delete

Deletes the Private Charge Print document.Note • If documents with the same user ID are all deleted, the user ID will be deleted.

Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.201).

Print

Prints the Private Charge Print document.Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.202).

When [Delete] is Selected

1 Select [Yes].

Yes

Deletes the document.Important • Once the document is deleted, it cannot be restored.

No

Cancels deleting the document.

Page 204: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

9 Job Status

202

Job

Statu

s

9

When [Print] is Selected

1 Select what to do with the document after printing.

Print and Delete

Starts printing the document. After printing, deletes the document.

Print and Save

Starts printing the document. After printing, the document remains undeleted.

Cancel

Cancels printing the document.

Deleting the Print Job with an Invalid User ID

All the print jobs that have a User ID regardless whether it is valid User ID or not are stored with the Private Charge Print feature. To minimize the unnecessary print jobs, specify how long print jobs can be saved for, so that they can be automatically deleted after a specified period of time. Or the system administrator can manually delete them.

The following describes how to delete documents that have an invalid User ID stored with the Private Charge Print feature.For details on how to specify a duration of how long the print jobs are kept, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Stored Document Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2 Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed, and select [Enter].

3 Press the <Job Status> button.

4 Select the [Secure Print Jobs & More] tab.

5 Select [Private Charge Print].

6 Select the User ID to be deleted.

7 Select the document to be deleted, and then select [Delete].

Page 205: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Printing Pending Jobs

203

Job

Statu

s

9

Printing Pending Jobs

This section describes how to print pending jobs.Note • If there are no pending jobs, the [Print Waiting Jobs] button is disabled.

1 Press the <Job Status> button.

2 Select [Print Waiting Jobs].

Page 206: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

9 Job Status

204

Job

Statu

s

9

Handling Error Terminations

This section describes how to handle error terminations.

For a Print Job

Select a job shown as an error termination in the [Completed Jobs] tab to check the error code. Follow the error code instructions.For information on error codes, refer to "12 Problem Solving" > "Erro Code" in the Administrator Guide.

For a Scan Job

A transmission report (undelivered) is printed.For more information on transmission reports (undelivered), refer to "4 Machine Status" > Machine Information" > "Automatically Printed Reprts/Lists" in the Administrator Guide. For details on how to print transmission reports (undelivered) automatically, refer to "5 System Settings" > Common Service Settings" > "Reports" in the Administrator Guide.

For Other Jobs

Print a Job History Report, and check the execution results.For information about job history reports, refer to "Checking Completed Jobs" (P.193).

Page 207: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

10 Computer Operations

This chapter describes how to print documents, import scanned documents, and operate CentreWare Internet Services on your computer.Note • Some models do not support the features described in this chapter. An optional

package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

• The computer screen images shown in this section are as of October 2007.

Features Overview....................................................................................206

Printing......................................................................................................212

E-mail Printing ..........................................................................................213

Importing Scanned Data ...........................................................................215

Page 208: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

10 Computer Operations

206

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

Features Overview

This section describes the overview of features that can be operated on a computer.

Print Driver

In order to print from your computer, a print driver must be installed on the computer.For instructions on installing the print driver, refer to the manual contained in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.

Print Driver Screen

Print Features

The main print features of the machine are as follows:To learn about print features, click [Help] on the print driver screen to see the print driver's online help. For information on printing, refer to "Printing" (P.212).

Note • Some features are not available unless you perform optional component settings in the [Printer] tab. The unavailable features are grayed out.

Multiple-Up

Prints multiple pages onto one sheet of paper.

2 Sided Printing

Prints data on both sides of paper. Only available when the machine has the 2-sided printing feature.

Poster

Splits one page of print data into multiple sheets of paper and expands the printed image to fit the size of each sheet. Used to create large posters, etc.

Booklet Creation

Performs 2-sided printing and page allocation for printing a booklet in the correct page order. Only available when the machine has the 2-sided printing feature.

Transparency Separators

Automatically inserts a blank sheet of paper as a separator each time a transparency is printed.

Page 209: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Features Overview

207

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

Watermark

Prints fixed text, such as "Confidential", over the print data.

Secure Print

Temporarily stores the print data on the machine, to print it with the print command from the machine. This feature allows you to set a passcode, which is helpful to print confidential documents.For information on how to print, refer to "Secure Print" (P.194).

Sample Set

Before printing multiple sets of a document, you can first print one copy for trial, and then print the rest from the machine.For information on how to print, refer to "Sample Set" (P.196).

Delayed Print

Temporarily stores the print data on the machine to print it at specified time.For information on how to print, refer to "Delayed Print" (P.197).

Print from Mailbox

Temporarily stores the print data in a registered mailbox, to print it with the print command from the machine.Important • This feature requires Scanner Kit (optional).

• The print result of the Print from Mailbox feature may be inferior to the other print results in quality.

For information on how to print, refer to "Checking Document Details" (P.163).

E-mail Printing

When the E-mail feature is available, allows you to send e-mail with the TIFF, PDF, JPEG(JFIF), or XPS format documents attachment from a computer to the machine. The received e-mail is automatically printed from the machine.Note • If the Authentication feature is enabled, received e-mails are not printed automatically.

For details on how to use this software, refer to "E-mail Printing" (P.213).

Print Features using Authentication Information

Charge Print

Authenticates users to prevent unauthorized printing. The machine holds a print job and prints it when the user is authenticated. The machine can also be configured to store multiple print jobs until the user requests to print them on the control panel.Note • To prohibit users other than you from operating documents, a passcode should be

registered for the Billing ID on the print driver.

For details on how to setup charge printing, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide. For information on how to print, refer to "Charge Print" (P.198).

Private Charge Print

Temporarily stores print data in the machine for each authentication user ID, and allows you to request on the machine’s control panel to print the data. Only the print data for the authenticated user are displayed on the control panel to be handled. Using this feature reduces the amount of unnecessary outputs, because you can select and print only the necessary data.Note • If you do not want to store unneeded documents, you can configure the machine to store

only the jobs whose authentication succeeded.

Page 210: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

10 Computer Operations

208

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

For details on how to set up private charge print, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide. For information on how to print, refer to "Private Charge Print" (P.200).

Network Scanner Utility 3

Network Scanner Utility 3 allows you to import scan documents stored on the device's mailbox onto a network computer.

There are two types of Network Scanner Utility 3:Note • Use the included CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit to install Network Scanner Utility 3.

Network Scan Driver

Network Scan Driver is software to allow a client-side application to import documents (scan data) from the machine's mailbox via the network.For details on how to use this software, refer to "Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application" (P.215).

Mailbox Viewer 3

Mailbox Viewer 3 is software to import documents from a machine's mailbox without using any client-side application.For details on how to use this software, refer to "Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3" (P.217).

CentreWare Internet Services

CentreWare Internet Services requires a TCP/IP environment, and enables you to view the status of the machine and its jobs, as well as change settings via a web browser. You can also import documents saved in a mailbox.For information on importing documents, refer to "Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.219).

For CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "7 Using CentreWare Internet Services" in the Administrator Guide.

CentreWare Internet Services Screen

The [CentreWare Internet Services] screen consists of five frames (divided windows).The information displayed in each frame depends on the feature: [Status], [Jobs], [Print/Scan], [Properties], or [Support].Note • Clicking [Help] in the top frame displays the online help for CentreWare Internet Services.

Top frame

Right frameUpper left frame

Lower left frame

Page 211: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Features Overview

209

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

Top Frame

Displayed at the top of the window. This frame includes the logo, the machine model name, a link to the online help, and tabs (links) leading to each feature.For details on each feature provided by CentreWare Internet Services, click [Help] in this frame to see the help.

Right Frame / Upper Left Frame

Information appearing in the right and upper left frames changes depending on the feature. Selecting a feature displays its available features and information in these frames.

Lower Left Frame

Displays a link to the Fuji Xerox home page.

Main features of CentreWare Internet Services are listed below.

Note • Some field settings take effect after a reboot (after power-cycling the machine or after changing a system setting from the control panel).

• If a setting is changed by CentreWare Internet Services during operation on the control panel, the updated information does not appear on the control panel. Power-cycle the machine in that case.

• When the authentication feature is enabled, entering your user name and passcode are required if the Properties tab is to be displayed or if a setting managed by the system administrator is to be changed. The default user name and passcode are "11111" and "x-admin" respectively.

Browser

CentreWare Internet Services supports the following browsers:

For Windows OS

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack 1 or later

Netscape Navigator 7.1 or later

For Mac OS X 10.3.9

Netscape Navigator 7.1 or later

Safari 1.3 or later

Tab Name Main Features

Status Displaying the machine statusDisplaying the status of the paper trays, output trays and consumables such as toner cartridges.Linking to the copyright screen.

Jobs Displaying a list of jobs and job history, and deleting jobs.

Print Job Submission Allows you to specify and print a file stored on your computer.

Scan Mailbox Allows you to register and set mailboxes.

Job Template Allows you to create, edit, and delete job templates.

Properties Displaying and setting the items such as Machine configuration, Interface, and Emulation settings.

Support Displaying support information

Page 212: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

10 Computer Operations

210

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

Browser Settings

Before using this service, ensure the following settings on your browser.

The following is the setting procedure for Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1.

1 Select [Internet Options] from the [Tools] menu.

2 In the [General] tab, click [Settings] for [Temporary Internet Files].

3 In the [Settings] dialog box, select [Every visit to the page] or [Every time you start Internet Explorer] for [Check for newer versions of stored pages:].

4 Click [OK].

Proxy Server and Port Number

The following describes proxy server settings and a port number required for this service.

Proxy Server

We recommend that you access this service directly, not through a proxy server.Note • If using a proxy server, specifying the machine's IP address in the browser results in slower

responses, and could prevent some screens from appearing. In this case, it is necessary to set the machine's IP address on the browser not to go through a proxy server. Refer to your browser's documentation for the setting instructions.

Port Number

The default port number of this service is "80". The port number can be changed in [Properties] > [Protocol Settings] > [HTTP]. Usable ports are "1" to "65535".

If you set the port to a number other than 80, you must add ":" and the port number after the IP address or the Internet address when entering the address into your browser.

For example, if the port number is 8080, the URL is:

http://[the machine's IP address]:8080/

or

http://[the machine's Internet address]:8080/

You can check the port number in [Configuration Report]. For information on [Configuration Report], refer to "4 Machine Status" > "Machine Information" > "Print Reports" in the Administrator Guide.

Note • If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https" instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.

Starting CentreWare Internet Services

To use this service, perform the following procedure on your computer.

1 Start up the computer, and a web browser.

2 Enter the machine's IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and press the <Enter> key.

Note • If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is registered in the domain name server, you can access the machine using the Internet address with the combination of the host name and the domain name. For example, if the host name is "myhost", and the domain name is "example.com", then the Internet address is "myhost.example.com".

• Ask your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address.

• When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the Internet address.

• If using the authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode into the [User Name] and [Password] fields. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.

Page 213: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Features Overview

211

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https" instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.

• If authentication of the system administrator fails, the following message is displayed in the right frame of web browser."Authentication failed"

• If the number of times that authentication fails exceeds the set number, the following message is displayed in the right frame of web browser."Switch the machine Off and then On for System Administrator login."

Page 214: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

10 Computer Operations

212

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

Printing

This section describes the print procedure.

The print procedure depends on the application software you use. For details, refer to the documentation provided with the application.To learn about print features, click [Help] on the print driver screen to see the print driver's online help.

1 Select [Print] from the [File] menu on the application.

2 Confirm [Printer Name] and click [Properties] if necessary.

3 Set the properties if necessary.

4 Click [OK].

5 Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.

Page 215: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

E-mail Printing

213

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

E-mail Printing

You can send e-mail attaching TIFF, PDF, JPEG, or XPS documents from a computer to the machine. Received e-mail is automatically printed. This feature is called "E-mail Printing".

Setup

To use the E-mail Printing feature, the following setup is necessary. Check with your system or network administrator whether these settings have been completed.

Network Environment Settings

In order to use E-mail Printing, an e-mail account must be registered.

E-mail Environment Settings

Settings for the port activation, machine's e-mail address, TCP/IP environment, e-mail server, etc.For information on E-mai Environment Settings, refer to "8 E-mai Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Sending E-Mail

The following describes how to send e-mail from the computer to the machine, using Outlook Express as an example.

1 Use your e-mail software to create an e-mail body, and then attach a document to the e-mail if necessary.

Important • Only plain text is permitted for the e-mail body. Change the body text format to plain text by the e-mail software setting.

• Any forwarded e-mail (that is attached to another e-mail) cannot be printed.

Note • If the extension of the attached files is other than ".tif", ".tiff", ".pdf", ".jpeg", ".jpg", ".jpe", ".ifif", and ".xps", the file may not be printed correctly.

• Up to 31 documents can be attached.

2 Enter the machine's e-mail address as a recipient.

3 Send the e-mail.

Note • The printer prints the e-mail body and the attached documents according to the following settings. The offset output setting is disabled in all cases.

• E-mail body:Default values of the PCL print driver for this machine which is installed on the computer

• TIFF or JPEG formatted attached file:Default values of the logical printer set in [Memory Settings] of [TIFF/JPEG] in [Emulation Settings] of CentreWare Internet Services

Page 216: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

10 Computer Operations

214

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

• PDF formatted attached file:Settings of the PDF direct print when [Print Processing Mode] of the PDF direct print is set to [PDF Bridge].Default values of the logical printer configured by [Logical Printer Number] of [PostScript] in [Emulation Settings] of CentreWare Internet Services when [Print Processing Mode] of the PDF direct print is set to [PS].

Page 217: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Importing Scanned Data

215

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

Importing Scanned Data

There are four methods for importing documents from a machine's mailbox to your computer.

Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application ..................................................................... 215

Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3 ......................................................................................... 217

Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services ....................................................................... 219

Importing with the WebDAV Protocol .................................................................................... 220

Each procedure is as follows.

Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application

The following describes how to import documents from a machine's mailbox to application software.

Network Scan Driver is used to import stored documents.

Network Scan Driver is software to allow a client-side application to import documents (scan data) from a machine's mailbox via a network.For instructions on installing Network Scan Driver, refer to the manual contained in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.

To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to refer to the Network Scan Driver's online help.

1 Launch application software to which documents are imported.

Important • The application must support TWAIN. TWAIN is a standard for scanners and other input devices.

Note • For information on supported applications, refer to the "Readme" contained in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.

2 From the [File] menu, select the command for selecting the scanner (source).

3 Select [FX Network Scanner 3 TWAIN], and click [Select].

4 From the [File] menu, select the command for importing the image from the scanner.

5 From the displayed list, click the scanner name of the machine, and click [Next].

Note • If no items are shown in the list, click [Search Again]. The application searches for scanners.

• To display the scanner names, use the dialog box which can be displayed by clicking [Search/Display Settings]. For information on how to change the displayed scanner names, refer to "Changing the display of scanner names" (P.216).

• Only scanners on the network are automatically listed. To view a scanner on another network, click [Search/Display Settings], and register the IP Address and scanner name. For information on changing settings, refer to "Changing Network Scan Driver Settings" (P.216).

Page 218: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

10 Computer Operations

216

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

6 In the [Mailbox Number] field, enter the mailbox number (001 - 500) that contains the document to be imported. In the [Passcode] field, enter a password (up to 20 digits).

Note • From the next time you perform this operation and onward, you will be able to select a mailbox number from [Registered Mailboxes].

• Clicking [Select Scanner] returns to step 5, where you can reselect a scanner.

7 Click [Confirm].

8 Select a document to import from the list, and click [Import].

Note • You can select one or more documents.

• [Import], [Refresh], and [Delete] are available from the menu that appears when you right-click on the list.

When the import starts, the scan data is forwarded from the mailbox to the client.

After the forwarding, the data is loaded onto the application software and is deleted from the mailbox.Note • An icon is attached to a document that is scanned in pages and whose forwarding operation

has not been completed.

• For most applications except DocuWorks, Network Scan Driver expands the compressed data and transfers the data to the applications in BMP format. For DocuWorks, on the other hand, Network Scan Driver transfers the data without data expansion processing. For this reason, it does not take much time for data transfer.

• The machine can be set not to delete the document from the mailbox after forwarding operation. For details on how to set this, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Setup" > "Create Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.

Changing Network Scan Driver SettingsTo learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to refer to the Network Scan Driver's online help.

Changing the display of scanner names

You can change the display of scanner names listed.

To change the display of scanner names, click [Search/Display Settings] in the scanner selection dialog box.

Under [Scanner Name Display], you can change the method in which scanner names are displayed in [Scanner for Searching].

Specify scanners to search for under [Search Target Settings].Note • If you register a scanner by clicking [Add],

you can display scanners from other networks.

Page 219: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Importing Scanned Data

217

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

Import Method for Scanned Documents

You can change the display and the import settings for documents scanned from a mailbox.

To change the import method, click [Import Settings] from [File] menu in the document selection dialog box, and configure the settings in the dialog box that appears.

Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3

The following describes how to use Mailbox Viewer 3 to import a document from a machine's mailbox.

Mailbox Viewer 3 is software to import documents from a machine's mailbox without using any client-side application.For instructions on installing Mailbox Viewer 3, refer to the manual contained in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.

To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to see the Mailbox Viewer 3 online help.

1 Click [Start] and select [Programs] > [FujiXerox] > [Network Scanner Utility 3] > [Mailbox Viewer 3].

Note • If you used another directory for installation, specify the directory instead of above.

2 From the displayed list, click the scanner name of the machine, and click [Next].

Note • If no items are shown in the list, click [Search Again]. The application searches for scanners.

• To display the scanner names, use the dialog box which can be displayed by clicking [Search/Display Settings]. For information on how to change the displayed scanner names, refer to "Changing the display of scanner names" (P.218).

• Only when the machine is connected to the network, the scanner name is automatically shown in the list. To view the machine connected to other networks, click on [Search/Display Settings] and register an IP address and scanner name. For information on how to change the settings, refer to "Changing the display of scanner names" (P.218).

3 In the [Mailbox Number] field, enter the number of the mailbox (001 - 500) that contains the document to be imported. In the [Passcode] field, enter a password (up to 20 digits).

Note • From the next time you perform this operation and onward, you will be able to select a mailbox number from [Registered Mailboxes].

• Clicking [Select Scanner] returns to step 2, where you can reselect a scanner.

4 Click [Confirm].

Page 220: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

10 Computer Operations

218

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

5 Select a document from the list, and click [Import].

Note • One or more documents can be selected.

• For information on Mailbox Viewer 3 settings, refer to "Import settings for scanned documents" (P.219).

6 Clicking on the [Import] button removes stored documents from the mailbox, and saves them in the specified directory.

Changing Mailbox Viewer 3 SettingsTo learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to see the Mailbox Viewer 3 online help.

Changing the display of scanner names

You can change the display of scanner names listed.

To change the display of scanner names, click [Search/Display Settings] in the scanner selection dialog box.

Under [Scanner Name Display], you can change the method in which scanner names are displayed in [Scanner for Searching].

Specify scanners to search for under [Search Target Settings].Note • If you register a scanner by clicking [Add],

you can display scanners from other networks.

Page 221: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Importing Scanned Data

219

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

Import settings for scanned documents

You can change the display and the import settings for documents scanned from a mailbox.

To change the import method, click [Details] from [File] menu in the document selection dialog box, and configure the settings in the dialog box that appears.

Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services

Describes methods for importing documents stored on the machine's mailbox using CentreWare Internet Services.

CentreWare Internet Services allows you to import documents from a machine's mailbox to a computer through no application software.For overview of CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.208).

1 Start up the computer, and a web browser.

2 Enter the machine's IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and press the <Enter> key.

Note • If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is registered in the domain name server, you can access the machine using the Internet address with the combination of the host name and the domain name. For example, if the host name is "myhost", and the domain name is "example.com", then the Internet address is "myhost.example.com".

• Ask your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address.

• When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the Internet address.

• If using the authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode into the [User Name] and [Password] fields. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.

• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https" instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.

Page 222: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

10 Computer Operations

220

Co

mp

uter O

peratio

ns

10

3 Select [Mailbox] from the [Scan] tab.

4 Select the mailbox that contains the document to be imported. In the [Passcode] field, enter a passcode (up to 20 digits).

5 Place a check next to each document to be imported, and click [Retrieve].

Note • To retrieve a color document as a JPEG, place a check next to [Retrieve Page], and specify the page number.

6 Click [Save this link].

For details on this operation, click [Help] in the bottom frame to see the online help.

Importing with the WebDAV Protocol

To import documents from a machine's mailbox without using Network Scan Driver, use a Fuji Xerox application supporting the WebDAV protocol, such as EasyOperator.

The documents in a mailbox can be listed/displayed with thumbnails.

The WebDAV protocol uses an HTTP port. If HTTP communication is encrypted, WebDAV communication for importing scanned documents is also encrypted.To use the WebDAV protocol, a WebDAV port must be activated on the machine beforehand. For information on network settings, refer to "5 System Settings" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" in the Administrator Guide. For information on the operations on the application, refer to the documentation provided with the application.

Page 223: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

11 Appendix

This chapter contains a list of terms used in this guide.

Glossary....................................................................................................222

Page 224: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

11 Appendix

222

Ap

pen

dix

11

Glossary

Term Description

A3 420×297 mm paper

A4 297×210 mm paper

A5 210×148 mm paper

Alias An alternative name of the machine's e-mail address.For example, when the e-mail address for the machine is [email protected], you can use [email protected] (alias) to reach the same location.

Auto Center A feature that automatically moves an image to the center of paper when copying.

Auto Clear A feature that automatically returns the touch screen to its default display when the machine is inactive for a period of time.

Auto Paper Select Based on the document loaded and the magnification selected, the machine automatically selects an appropriate paper size.

Auto Tray Switching When paper runs out during copying, another tray of identical paper size and orientation automatically begins supplying paper.

B4 364×257 mm paper

B5 257×182 mm paper

Binding Shift When creating a booklet, this feature adds margins to the center binding area of documents.

Book Scanning A feature that copies the left and right pages of an unfolded document onto two separate sheets of paper.

CMS Color Management System. It corrects device-dependent color differences to match the colors printed on your output with the colors displayed on your screen.

Collate A feature that delivers each copy set in the same order as the original documents.

Cut Paper Standard paper sizes, such as A4 and B5.

Default Screen A screen displayed on the touch screen immediately after switching the power on, or pressing the <Clear All> button. The screen is also displayed when the Auto Clear feature is used.

Default Value A factory default value, or a value set in the System Administration mode.

Document Image An image of a document scanned by the machine.

DPI Dots per inch. A unit used to describe printing resolution in terms of the number of dots printed in one inch. Used as a unit to describe resolution.

Edge Erase A feature that erases the top/bottom, left/right or center edge of a document image when copying.

Emulation This refers to operating the printer to achieve the same print results as when printing with other manufacturers' printers. This mode is called the Emulation Mode.

Page 225: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Glossary

223

Ap

pen

dix

11

Error Code A code is displayed on the control panel or a report when a problem occurs.

Fax Server A feature that transfers image data received by the machine to a Server Fax server and transfers image data received by a Server Fax server to the machine via a network based on the settings you made.Using this feature enables you to manage multiple machines.

ICM Image Color Matching. A color management software used with Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. It corrects device-dependent color differences to match the colors printed on your output with the colors displayed on your screen.

Image Enhancement A feature which makes the border between black and white smooth, with rough edges reduced, giving the appearance of a higher resolution.

Image Rotation This feature rotates a document image by 90 degrees when the document orientation is not the same as the paper supply orientation.

Independent X-Y% A feature that transforms a document image horizontally or vertically.

Internet A worldwide communications network that combines miscellaneous networks.

JCL JCL (Job Control Language) describes job names and types of devices. The operating system decodes the descriptions to process.

Job Offset This feature outputs the pages in alternating offsets to make page groupings easier to recognize.

Line Monitor Allows you to audibly monitor a transmission through the speaker after dialing and until you are connected.

Local Device This term refers to this machine. This is a general term for terminals such as personal computers.

Low Toner Alert Tone A tone the device sounds when the drum/toner cartridge needs to be replaced.

Machine Ready Tone A tone produced when the status of the machine changes from standby to ready, such as when the power is switched on.

MIME Type Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension.A method for determining what kind of data was received by e-mail. A MIME type refers to the type of data.

Multiple-Up A feature that copies two or four documents onto one sheet of paper.

NV Memory A non-volatile memory, which stores the settings information of the printer even when the printer is switched off.

Optional accessory This refers to a product that is sold separately. In addition to the machine's basic configuration, various optional features are available as separately-sold optional accessories. (For more information on optional accessories, contact our Customer Support Center.)

PJL Printer Job Language.A command language for controlling printers developed by Hewlett Packard.

Term Description

Page 226: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

11 Appendix

224

Ap

pen

dix

11

POP3 Post Office Protocol Version 3.One of the commonly used communications protocols used for receiving e-mail.It sets up a private mailbox on a provider's e-mail server, and receives messages when a communication is made. POP3 is for receiving only. SMTP is used for sending e-mail.

Power Saver Feature A feature that switches the machine status to standby after a period of inactivity.The following power saver features can be set for the machine.Low Power Mode: The power to the fuser unit and motor is

lowered when the machine is left unused for a fixed amount of time. The touch screen goes out, and the <Energy Saver> button lights.

Sleep Mode: Almost all of the device is in standby mode, the machine consumes the least power.

Print Page Buffer A location where print data is rendered.

Printable Area The actual area on paper which can be printed.

RAM Random Access Memory. It is a storage device (memory) where information can be retrieved as well as stored.

Receive Buffer A space used to temporarily store data sent from a client computer.

Remote Terminal A terminal with which you want to communicate. This is a general term for terminals such as personal computers.

Resolution Represents a fineness of detail that can be distinguished on an image. It is usually described in terms of the number of dots per square inch (dpi), and a higher value indicates a higher resolution (finely represented).

ROM Read Only Memory. It is a storage device (memory) specific for the retrieval of information.

ROS Raster Output Scanner. It is a device for writing image signals to a drum (light sensitive). A ROS is often referred to as a laser beam scanner.

Scan Sensing or reading a paper document and converting the optical image of the document to an electronic image.The machine offers two scanning devices: document glass and document feeder.

Screen The screen that is displayed on the touch screen. It displays messages and feature buttons.

Select In this document, "Select" refers to highlighting a feature selection by touching the feature button on the touch screen with your finger.

Separator A blank, colored, or copied paper inserted between sections or topics in a set of documents.

SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.A communications protocol (an agreement governing the way data is transmitted) commonly used for sending and receiving e-mail.

Term Description

Page 227: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Glossary

225

Ap

pen

dix

11

Start Reservation In this guide, this refers to loading a document, selecting features, and pressing the <Start> button immediately after switching the power on. Once the machine is warmed up and ready, it will automatically start copying.

Status Display Code A code that indicates the machine status. When an error occurs on the machine, a status display code appears on the touch screen.

Store In this guide, it is referred to as scanning an image of a document and saving the image on the machine.

Stored Programming By registering a series of operations, the machine executes the operations with just one press of [Stored Programming] on the touch screen.

Transparency Copy A feature that copies on transparency films or inserts a sheet of blank or copied paper between transparency films.

UNC UNC (Universal Naming Convention) is a way to specify a path describing the location of a network resource, such as shared folders, or shared printers, on a network, Microsoft Networks (SMB). The UNC syntax uses "\\" before the hostname, hostname and resource name are delimited by "\".If the hostname is "myhost", and if its host shared folder name is "sharefolder", the UNC syntax is described as follows:\\myhost\sharefolder

Term Description

Page 228: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due
Page 229: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Index

227

Ind

ex

Numerics

2 Sided Book Copy .............................................. 65

2 Sided Copying .................................................. 59

2 Sided Printing ................................................. 206

2 Sided Scanning .............................................. 134

A

A3 plus high capacity tray (Tray 6) ...................... 34

adding a stamp/a date/page numbers to copies . 83

adding originals ................................................. 104

Address Book ............................................ 119, 130

adjusting copy density/sharpness/saturation of

images ................................................................. 63

adjusting scan density and image sharpness .... 144

adjusting the copy density ................................... 61

adjusting the image position ................................ 70

Advanced Settings ............................................ 143

<All Services> button .......................................... 38

Annotations ......................................................... 83

attaching covers to copies ................................... 78

Auto Size Detect ................................................ 148

B

Background Suppression ............................ 63, 144

Batch Print ......................................................... 165

Book Copying ...................................................... 64

Book Scanning .................................................. 147

Booklet ................................................................ 75

Booklet Creation .......................................... 75, 206

booklet output tray ............................................... 32

booklet output tray button .................................... 32

bottom left cover .................................................. 30

breaker ................................................................ 36

brightness dial ..................................................... 39

Browse .............................................................. 130

Build Job .............................................................. 99

C

<C (Clear)> button ............................................... 39

Calculator % ........................................................ 55

calling a stored program ....................................183

calling a stored program for Build Job ...............184

Cancel ................................................................191

CentreWare Internet Services ...................208, 219

changing the orientation of images ......................72

Chapter Start .....................................................102

Charge Print .......................................................207

checking completed jobs ...................................193

checking the finished output of the copy ............103

circuit breaker ................................................33, 34

<Clear All> button ................................................39

Color Scanning ..................................................133

Color Space .......................................................145

Combine Original Sets .......................................104

Compression Method .........................................137

Contrast .............................................................145

control panel ..................................................30, 38

Copies ..................................................................60

<Copy> button .....................................................38

Copy Output .........................................................96

copying facing pages onto separate sheets ........64

copying multiple pages onto one sheet ...............81

Covers .................................................................78

creating a booklet ................................................75

<Custom 2> button ..............................................38

<Custom 3> button ..............................................38

D

De-curl button ......................................................34

de-curl button .......................................................32

Delayed Print .....................................................207

Delete Outside/Delete Inside .............................106

deleting charge print documents ........................199

deleting outside or inside of the selected area ..106

deleting private print documents ........................201

deleting secure print documents ........................195

deleting stored documents .................................194

deleting stored programs ...................................181

density levels .....................................................144

document cover ...................................................30

document feeder ..........................................44, 110

document feeder tray ...........................................31

document glass ......................................30, 45, 111

Index

Page 230: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

228

Ind

ex

document guides .................................................31

Document Name ................................................155

document output tray ...........................................31

document stopper ................................................31

DocuWorks ................................................136, 137

E

Edge Erase ..................................................69, 149

E-mail .................................................................119

E-mail Printing ...........................................207, 213

<Energy Saver> button ........................................39

enlarged copies ...................................................53

Enter Output Size ..............................................151

entering text .........................................................42

entering/changing a stored program name ........182

erasing edges and margin shadows in

the document .....................................................149

erasing edges and margin shadows of

the document .......................................................68

erasing the background color of

documents ...........................................................63

erasing the background color of

documents/adjusting contrast ............................144

error lamp ............................................................34

F

File Format .........................................................135

File Name ..........................................................153

File Name Conflict .............................................155

finisher tray ..........................................................32

Folding .................................................................95

Form Overlay .....................................................105

From ..................................................................124

front cover ......................................................30, 31

front cover for high capacity tray unit. ..................30

fuser .....................................................................31

G

General Scan Features ......................................133

H

handling error terminations ................................204

Hidden Text ......................................................... 93

high capacity tray unit .......................................... 33

hole punch waste container ................................. 33

I

ID Card Copying .................................................. 98

Image Enhancement ......................................... 144

Image Options ................................................... 144

Image Quality ...................................................... 62

Image Rotation .................................................... 72

Image Shift .......................................................... 70

Independent X-Y% .............................................. 54

inserting blank sheets between transparencies .. 80

interface module front cover ................................ 34

interposer ............................................................ 32

<Interrupt> button ................................................ 39

<Interrupt> indicator ............................................ 39

J

Job Assembly ...................................................... 99

Job Flow Sheets ................................................ 172

<Job in Memory> indicator .................................. 39

Job Status ......................................................... 190

<Job Status> button ............................................ 39

JPEG ................................................................. 137

L

Layout Adjustment ....................................... 64, 146

left cover ........................................................ 31, 33

Left Page then Right .......................................... 147

license ................................................................. 23

Lighten/Darken .............................................. 61, 63

loading documents ............................................ 110

locking casters ..................................................... 30

<Log In/Out> button ............................................ 39

Login Name ....................................................... 156

Low Power Mode ................................................. 37

M

machine components .......................................... 30

<Machine Status> button .................................... 39

Mailbox .............................................................. 158

Page 231: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Index

229

Ind

ex

Mailbox Viewer 3 ....................................... 116, 208

making 2 sided copies ........................................ 58

making 2-sided copies of facing pages ............... 65

making copies to overlay documents ................ 105

making enlarged copies spread over multiple

sheets ................................................................. 82

making enlarged/reduced copies ........................ 53

making multiple copies on a single sheet ........... 95

making multiple copies on one sheet .................. 83

making reversed copies of images ..................... 73

managing documents security ............................ 92

Message ........................................................... 125

Meta Data ......................................................... 156

Mirror Image/Negative Image ............................. 73

Mixed Sized Originals ................................. 68, 148

More... ............................................................... 136

MRC High Compression ................................... 137

Multiple-Up .................................................. 81, 206

N

Network Scan Driver ................................. 208, 216

Network Scanner Utility2 ................................... 208

Network Scanning ............................................. 127

New Repicient ................................................... 122

non-standard size document ............................... 67

numeric keypad ................................................... 39

O

<Online> indicator ............................................... 39

Original Orientation .. 60, 68, 69, 71, 81, 84, 90, 93,

..................................... 97, 104, 107, 135, 149, 150

Original Size ................................................ 67, 148

Original Type ............................................... 62, 135

Originals .............................................................. 60

Originals Orientation ........................................... 74

Output Format ..................................................... 75

Output Orientation ............................................... 94

output tray ........................................................... 32

P

paper eject button ............................................... 34

Paper Supply ...................................................... 56

paper supply (selecting the paper for copying) ... 56

Password ................................................... 132, 156

PDF ........................................................... 136, 137

Photo ................................................................. 135

Photo & Text ...................................................... 135

Photographs ...................................................... 143

Poster .......................................................... 82, 206

Power Saver mode .............................................. 37

power switch ........................................................ 30

preferentially printing pending jobs .................... 203

Preset Repeat Image ........................................... 95

Print ................................................................... 212

print driver .......................................................... 206

Print from Mailbox .............................................. 207

printing control numbers on the background of

copies .................................................................. 89

printing delayed print documents ....................... 198

printing sample set documents .......................... 197

printing secure print documents ................ 196, 202

printing security print documents ............... 196, 202

printing stored documents ................................. 194

Private Charge Print .................................. 200, 207

processing documents scanned with different

settings as one job ............................................... 99

Promote Job ...................................................... 191

Proportional ....................................................... 151

Proportional % ..................................................... 54

Punching .............................................................. 97

R

Read Receipts ................................................... 153

Recipient(s) ....................................................... 123

Reduce/Enlarge ................................................. 151

reduced copies .................................................... 53

registering stored programs ............................... 180

Repeat Image ...................................................... 83

Reply To ............................................................ 154

Resolution .......................................................... 146

<Review> button .................................................. 39

right cover ............................................................ 32

Right Page then Left .......................................... 147

RSA BSAFE ........................................................ 23

S

sample button ...................................................... 34

Page 232: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

230

Ind

ex

Sample Job ........................................................103

Sample Set ........................................................207

saving the scanned data ....................................116

Scan ...................................................................215

scan density .......................................................144

Scan to Mailbox .................................................126

Scan to PC .........................................................129

scanning a color photograph .............................143

scanning both sides of a document ...................134

scanning different size documents simultaneously

.....................................................................67, 148

scanning facing pages on separate sheets .......147

Seachable Text ..................................................137

Secure Print .......................................................207

Secure Watermark ...............................................92

selecting a color mode .......................................133

selecting a file format for output data .................135

selecting the document type ........................62, 135

selecting the paper for copying ............................56

Send from Mailbox .............................................158

sending in sections ............................................153

Separators .........................................................101

Server ................................................................131

setting the action to be taken for file name

conflict ................................................................155

Shadow Suppression .........................................145

Shared Name .....................................................131

Sharpness ............................................................63

sharpness ..........................................................144

Sideways Images ...............................................135

Sleep Mode ..........................................................37

Specifying a Destination ....................................130

specifying a name for the file to be saved .........155

specifying a Name for the File to be sent ..........153

specifying a reply address .................................154

specifying a scan size ........................................148

specifying a scanning ratio ................................151

specifying a scanning resolution ........................146

specifying an image compression ratio

when scanning ...................................................152

Specifying face up or down ..................................94

specifying finishing options ..................................96

specifying the orientation of the

loaded documents ...............................................74

specifying the scan size for the document ...........67

Split Send ..........................................................153

stacker cart .......................................................... 34

stacker lower cover ............................................. 34

stacker output tray ............................................... 34

stacker top cover ................................................. 34

Standard Size .................................................... 148

staple cartridge .................................................... 33

staple cartridges for booklet ................................ 32

staple waste container ......................................... 32

Stapling ............................................................... 97

<Start> button ...................................................... 39

<Stop> button ...................................................... 39

Subject .............................................................. 124

suppressing the document background ............ 145

T

Tab Margined Shift .............................................. 93

Text ................................................................... 135

toner cartridges ................................................... 31

Toner cover ......................................................... 30

Top Page then Bottom ...................................... 147

touch screen ........................................................ 38

transfer module ................................................... 31

Transfer Protocol ............................................... 129

Transparency Options ......................................... 80

Transparency Separators .................................. 206

Tray 1 .................................................................. 30

Tray 2 .................................................................. 30

Tray 3 .................................................................. 30

Tray 4 .................................................................. 30

Tray 5 (Bypass) ................................................... 30

Tray 5 (bypass) ................................................... 33

Tray 5 (bypass) top cover .................................... 33

Tray 6 .................................................................. 30

Tray 7 .................................................................. 30

tri-Fold output tray ............................................... 33

tri-Fold output tray button .................................... 33

U

Upright Images .................................................. 135

User Name ........................................................ 131

V

variable size ...................................................... 148

Page 233: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

Index

231

Ind

ex

W

waste bottle ......................................................... 31

waste bottle cover ............................................... 31

Watermark .................................................. 89, 207

WebDAV ................................................... 116, 220

X

XPS ................................................................... 137

Page 234: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due
Page 235: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due

4127/4112 User Guide

DE3858E2-1 (Edition 1)

November 2007

Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007 by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.

Page 236: RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. - Fuji Xeroxonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-FX4127_4112.pdf · Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due